frenic4600fm5d cdjs1fvx-5316a ver - fuji electric · · 2016-06-06we are grateful for your...

INR-HJ5235-E

214 pages in total Version 1 Mar 01, 2013

FFFRRREEENNNIIICCC444666000000FFFMMM555ddd

INR-HJ5235-E－－

Introduction

We are grateful for your purchase of our IGBT inverter FRENIC4600FM5d for 6.6kV direct motor drive.

The FRENIC4600 FM5d series offers high-performance and easy-maintenance inverters developed by integrating most advanced power electronics and microelectronics based on our company's long experience in AC variable speed drive technology and abundant achievements in application to plants.

This instruction manual describes the functions, specifications and hardware/software of the FRENIC4600FM5d series, and explains the indication and setting items necessary for operation.

0-1

INR-HJ5235-E－－

Precautions for safety

・The precautions indicated here concern important matters related to safety.

You are requested to observe them without fail. The safety precautions are classified into

ranks of "DANGER" and "CAUTION".

Wrong handling may cause death, heavy injury or other serious results.

Wrong handling may cause serious results depending on the case.It is assumed that You may get moderate injury or slight injury, and only that physical damages may occur.

・Warning label indications for precautions are labeled on the transformer panel, exterior surface and interior of inverter.

CAUTIONRisk of injury, electric shock and

fire. Read the instruction manual,

etc. before maintenance, checkup

or repair.

Do not proceed to maintenance, checkup or repair unless you are in charge of maintenance.

Turn off input power

before maintenance,

checkup or repair.

Risk of electric shock.

Do not touch live parts

when the door is open at

an energized status.


Connect ground.

DANGER

CAUTIONRisk of injury.

Do not introduce

stick or finger.

Descriptions in ” Caution” also may run into heavy results depending on conditions .You should observe both descriptions of DANGER and CAUTION without fail, because important items are described.

Note:- Heavy injury means blindness, injury, burn injury, electric shock, bone fracture, poisoning etc. ,

by which you may have aftereffects and require hospitalization for long periods or attending a hospital for medical treatment .

- Moderate injury means burn injury, electric shock etc. by which you don’t require hospitalization for long periods or attending a hospital for medical treatment.

- Physical damages means damages of assets and expanded damages of devices.


Never touch when

voltage is applied.

CAUTION

DANGER

0-2

INR-HJ5235-E－－

CAUTION

DANGER

DANGER

CAUTION

DANGER

Because this inverter system has a high voltage circuitry in its interior, the panel has

a double structure to avoid an electric shock. Before maintenance work, however,

the main circuit breaker and make sure the DC circuit discharged.

(For making sure the DC circuit is discharged, confirm the "CHARGE" LEDs VPM and VNM in each inverter

cell are completely extinguished.)

・Execute it after surely doing appropriate processing like the earth etc. when you work.

・Refer to the attached paper manual when you work maintaining.

・The electrical discharge time of the direct current voltage of the inverter cell is about 20 minutes.

・This equipment is applied to operate only a induction motor . Therefore, this can not be applied to other use.

・ This equipment can not be applied to such uses as a life support machine directly related to human bodies. ・ We manufacture this products under severe quality control, you should install the safety device when you will apply this product to the equipment that may occur serious failures or may cause serious damages due to failures of this product.

Application

・Mount on such incombustible platforms as metals.

・ Don’t locate this near combustible materials.

Installation

・ Don’t allow such different materials as waste paper, paper, waste wood, dust, waste metal to enter into this equipment, or adhere at the cooling fan.

・ Never operate by installing this product with such equipment that is damaged or lack parts.

・When you connect this equipment to power supply, perform wiring through a circuit protection breaker.

・ Connect earth wire to the ground without fail. ・ Carry out the wiring after making sure power supply has been ＯＦＦ(Open.)

・ Never switch on the product of which part was damaged, dropped off , or damaged during transportation.

Wiring

・Make sure that phase number and rated voltage of the product correspond to those of power supply.

・ Noise may be generated by this equipment and motor wirings. Pay attention to malfunction of neighboring sensors and devices.

DANGER

0-3

INR-HJ5235-E－－

DANGER

DANGER

CAUTION

CAUTION

DANGER

・Never touch radiating fins and transformers because of high temperature.

・ When you waste this product, treat this as an industrial waste.

Waste

・ Never modify this product.

Others

・ Switch power supply ON (Close) after mounting the surface cover (after closing the door if door type construction is adopted ) without fail. In addition, never remove the door cover during electrified condition. You may get electrical shock.・ Never operate the switch with wet hands.

You may get electrical shock.・ Never touch terminals even under suspension during this equipment is electrified.

You may get electrical shock.

Operation

・Turn off all the input power supplies after opening the input breaker and completely turning off "CHARGE LED VPM and VNM" in each inverter cell, and confirm voltage detector to the work after it energises of the check. Confirm the I/O terminal is 25V or less after confirming the voltage is not impressed by the voltage detector. Surely ground the main circuit I/O terminal of the medium voltage inverter device with the earth treatment device after it confirms it, and work afterwards.

・ Never allow other than specified person to perform maintenance and checkup or replacement of parts. (Remove such metal goods as watches, finger rings before working. )(Use insulated tools. )

Maintenace and checkup, and replacement of parts

InverterCell

OVGR

EN

EA

Medium voltage VVVF panel

Isolated from panel

Isolated fromchannel base

Input3.3kV/6.6kV

Motor3.3kV/6.6kV

About driving immediately after the installation・The product is installed about 2-6 months from the following beginning of mission are not abnormal though the smell is generated from the insulating material (varnish etc.) used for the input transformer though it depends on the driving pattern.

Earth treatment device

Earth treatment device

R

S

T

U

V

W

0-4

INR-HJ5235-E－－

DANGER

0-5

・Do the earth wiring according to the figure below earth system chart and the table of the size of the earth electric wireYou may get electrical shock.

About the earth system

IFCCTR

InverterCell

OVGR

EN

EA

EA-VF1

EA-VF2

ACL

(Option)

Input3.3kV/6.6kV

Shielded cableShielded cable

(Option)

ED

EC

EB

EB EC ED

① ②

③ ④ ⑤Medium voltage VVVF panel

Isolated from panel

Isolated fromchannel base

Rated voltage Capacity ①EA ②EN ③EB ④EC ⑤ED

～750

750～1800

60mm2 or more 14mm2 or more 38mm2 or more 14mm2 or more 5.5mm2 or more

60mm2 or more 14mm2 or more 60mm2 or more 14mm2 or more 5.5mm2 or more

60mm2 or more 14mm2 or more 100mm2 or more 14mm2 or more 5.5mm2 or more1800～2300

6.6kV

Earth system chart

Table of size of earth electric wire

EA-VF1

EA-VF2

ED

EC

EBEarth only for medium voltage inverter(VVVF panel exclusive use)Earth only for medium voltage inverter(Exclude the VVVF panel.)

Earth only for transformer neutral point and for prevention of misconnectionEarth for safety of low-voltage devices, class C for use in common with AC440V devices.

Earth for PC and PC I/O strage

Motor3～

INR-HJ5235-E

Contents

Chapter 1 INVERTER SPECIFICATIONS1-1 Configuration of Inverter System 1-11-2 Inverter Dimension 1-21-3 Inverter Potential Levels 1-31-4 Options 1-31-5 Inverter Specifications 1-4

Chapter 2 UNIT CONFIGURATION2-1 Basic Unit 2-12-2 Optical Conversion Unit 2-112-3 Local Controller 2-122-4 Over voltage ground detection signal receiving card (ORC) 2-162-5 PROFIBUS Transmission Unit (PSB) 2-172-6 MICREX Transmission Unit (DSM) 2-202-7 Modbus Transmission Unit (MOD) 2-212-8 Expanded DIO Card (DIO) 2-222-9 Analog Output Unit (AO) 2-242-10 Relay Unit 2-25

Chapter 3 TOUCH PANEL3-1 General 3-13-2 Explanation for using Keys, LED and LCD 3-13-3 Functions of Touch Panel keys 3-23-4 Explanation on the Touch panel Display Screen 3-33-5 Change diagram on Display Screen 3-43-6 Explanation of Example of Operation on Touch Panel 3-93-6-1 Setting Reference and Change from Touch Panel 3-93-6-2 Operation from Touch Panel 3-123-6-3 Referring to Fault Codes on Touch Panel when faults have occurred 3-13

Chapter 4 SETTING DATA4-1 List of Control Parameterｓ Setting 4-14-2 List of Detailed Control Parameterｓ Setting 4-13

Chapter 5 INDICATION & OUTPUT DATA5-1 Analog outputs and Transmission sending internal Data 5-15-2 DI (X terminal) Function Selection Data Codes 5-55-3 DO (Y terminal) Function Data Codes 5-85-4 Internal Digital Data Indication 5-125-5 Actual Value Notation Data Indication 5-16

Chapter 6 Transmission Data6-1 PROFIBUS Transmission 6-26-2 DSM (D-LINE, T-LINK) Transmission Data and Modbus transmission 6-156-3 Transmission RAS 6-21

Chapter 7 FAULT DIAGNOSIS7-1 Fault Cause Indication 7-17-2 Fault Codeｓ 7-27-3 Fault Code Details 7-107-4 Loader and Trace back Data 7-317-5 Trouble Shooting 7-33

Chapter 8 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE8-1 Preventive maintenance 8-1

INR-HJ5235-E－－

Chapter 1 Inverter Specifications

1-1 Configuration of Inverter System

[1] 6.6kV Specifications

1-1

Basic controller

Transformerpanel

Converter Panel

Touch panel (OP)

Ｍ

Opticalconverter unit

EOU

Relay unit

Control StackDi/DO

Optical fiber cable firing signal

1ΦAC200V･220V

Transmission line

Digital Datainput /output

Optical fiber cable status

signal

Main circuit power supply3ΦAC6000V･6600V/50･60Hz

PSU

OVG

1×9

Controller Panel

AO(OP)

DIO(OP)

(OP)

AO

Analog data output

U1 cell

U2 cell

U3 cell

V1 cell

V2 cell

V3 cell

W1 cell

W2 cell

W3 cell

3ΦAC220V

POD

MOD(OP)

DSM, MODorPSB(OP)

Loader (OP)

INR-HJ5235-E－－1-2

1-2 Inverter dimensions

Converter panel

Transformer panel& Control panel

Converter panelTransformer panel& Control panel

Fig.1

Ｃ

Ａ

Ｂ

2350

Ｅ

2000

570

780

6.6kVspecifications

960

1120

1320

670

2300

1540

Fig.2

470

Fig.1

1750

Fig.2

Ｃ

Ａ

Ｂ

2550

Ｅ

3000

3000

3000

3000

3400

3400

3400

3400

4100

4100

4100

1900

1900

1900

1900

2000

2000

2000

2000

2400

2400

2400

1100

1100

1100

1100

1400

1400

1400

1400

1700

1700

1700

535

535

535

535

535

535

535

535

375

375

375

1300

1300

1300

1300

1400

1400

1400

1400

1500

1500

1500

Capacity[kVA] B

(Transfomer)C

(Converter) depth

Dimensions[mm]

A(Overall)

Receiving voltage E

(Fan)

Outlinediagram

※The panel externals are a previous notice and might change. Inquire details separately.

INR-HJ5235-E－－

DANGER

DANGER

Option

1-4 Options

Device option

Card option

DSM

DIO

Name

MICREX transmission connection card

Digital internal data input/output card

Application

Touch panel

(standard)

Loader

Carries out parameter setting, display, change, and start and stop. Simplified version of loader.

A notebook PC for parameter constant setting, simultaneous change and status display, and start and stop. Data monitoring and trace-back functions are installed.

System option Commercial frequency operation changeover circuit.

Dial thermom-

eter

Input transformer ambient temperature detection and overheat contacts.

1-3 Inverter Potential Levels

Name

Control stack

Inverter cell

Insulation classLocation

Control printedcircuit board,etc.

Main circuit parts

Control printedboard, etc.

Remarks

－

1-3

Before work, discharge and then ground the main circuit

Before work, discharge and then ground the main circuit

Insulation classes for this high voltage inverter are as follows. Pay utmost attentionwhen operating.

DANGER

INR-HJ5235-E－－

FRENIC4600FM5d

1-4

1-1) Square reduction loading specifications (Standard Specification)

Current limit of inverter output

Frequency of inverter output

Receiving voltage

Frequency

Voltage

Outpu

t Capacity

Rating

Operation mode

Accuracy

Range

System

Contro

lA

mbie

nt conditio

ns

Installation place

Tempera-ture

Humidity

Housing panel

Cooling

Atmosph-ere

Protective structure

Rated current

1-5 Inverter Specifications

1) Standard specifications of FRENIC4600FM5d

[Hz]60502550

80%

105%

70%

(Note 1) The current limit value of the inverter output changes as follows in the square reduction loading specifications.

3φ, 6600 VAC / 50/60 Hz

6600 V AC (proportional to input voltage)

0.2 to 60 Hz (120 Hz max. optionally)

2 quadrants (no regenerative braking)

Digital setting frequency: ±0.01%Analog setting frequency: ±0.5%

1 ： 50

V/F constant control (simplified sensor-less vector control)

Indoor, altitude of 1,000 m or lower

0 to +40℃

20 to 85% RH, condensation unallowable

Self-standing and enclosed panel

Forced air cooling

640 V AC 12 circuits (6.6 kV specifications:at 6.6 kV input)

Normal environment free from corrosive gas, dust and inflammable/explosive gases

100% continuous

60 sec

1120 1540 2300780

98 134 20268

470

41

570

50

670

59

960

84

1320

115

1750

153

2000

173

120% 105% 120% 105% 120% 105% 120% 105%

INR-HJ5235-E－－

2) Control functions

The FRENIC4600FM5d series incorporates 32-bit RISC processors for the CPUs in the basic control sectionconcerned with frequency control, operational sequences, interfaces, etc. and also in the current controlsection, voltage control command shaping section and output voltage pulse waveform shaping sectionrespectively which require high-speed computation. The system is thus firmwared to permit optimal controlin various applications and has the following functions:

① Sequential function

Software is designed to provide functions for operating and stopping the system according tothe external sequence and control signals.

② Regulating function

Regulating function for optimal control based on sampling control theory.

③ Control parameter setting function

The touch panel, loader, POD or centralized monitoring system can be used to set controlparameters for each system or control parameters for optimal adjustment.

④ Fault detecting function

If a fault occurs, information about it can be checked on the touch panel display, POD,loader or centralized monitoring system. In addition, trace-back data on conditionsbefore and after the fault can be collected by the loader or centralized monitoring system.

⑤ Independent motor operation function

Motor can be operated independently with the FRENIC4600FM5d series alone,disconnected from the host system.The system is so configured that any of transmission operation, external input contact operation,analog command operation and console operation is available.For operating procedure in independent operation, refer to "3. TOUCH PANEL."

⑥ Power failure protection function

In the event of power failure, protective measure will be taken through interruption.The data in RAM is protected with a capacitor and remains intact for one week.In addition, setting data do not vanish in no electricity condition because of back-upin non volatile RAM (flash ROM.)

⑦ Online analog data output

For part of data in operation, analog output is available.

1-5

INR-HJ5235-E－－

3) Outline of software

① Processing assignment

The microprocessor is composed of a main CPU, ＡＣＲ－ＣＰＵ and a PULSE CPU, to which processing tasks are assigned as follows.

[Basic unit]

[Main ＣＰＵ]

・ To operate and stop the inverter according to external sequence and control signals.

・ To regulate voltage, limit current and control output frequency

・ To compute parameters for ＡＣＲ－ＣＰＵ and exchange operational data.

・ To detect faults.

・ To set or change control parameters.

・ To compute analog frequency setting

　　　　　　［ＡＣＲ－ＣＰＵ］

・ To regulate active current

・ To regulate reactive current

・ High-speed vector computation to detect current and issue command and voltage command computation

・ Analog data output

　　　　　　［Pulse distribution ＣＰＵ］

・ To compute PWM gate pulse and pulse dividing by voltage command

Provided with a microprocessor, carries out an optical communication for different statussignals with control units of the basic section.

[Local CTR]

・ To detect DC voltage

・ To fire initial charge thyristor

・ To monitor inverter cell inside fault

・ IGBT drive by conversion of optical gate signal from "Pulse distribution unit" into electrical signal

1-6

INR-HJ5235-E－－

Command value from MICREX or PROFIBUS

Rated frequency

Select desired mode

OperationON

To ＡＶＲ

ＦoutＦin

Acceleration/deceleration value from MICREX or PROFIBUS

Acceleration/deceleration time in setting No. 29 to 38 and 45 to 54

ＦIN

ＦOUT

0

0

Command value by touch panel setting

Inching frequency setting value in No. 9 to 10 and 57 to 70

Acceleration/deceleration computing element (HLR)

T1 T3 T4T2

T1・T3: Acceleration time

T2・T4: Deceleration time

Timing chart

t

t

Command value from analog frequency setter

Example for when acceleration/deceleration pattern "0" is selected.

Note) Order of decreasing precedence of frequency command value setting is: MICREX (or PROFIBUS) or Touch panel frequency command, AI frequency command, DI frequency command. Moreover, the frequency instruction setting is maintained the selected frequency setting mode in the motor during starting, and cannot switch the mode to the in operation.

For avoiding an overvoltage by rise of DC voltage generated at regenerative braking, you can select a function of stopping the deceleration action at a voltage rise (setting No. 161-1).

1-7

③ Acceleration/deceleration computer (HLR)

The acceleration/deceleration time can be set to those which set by setting No. 29 to 38 and 45 to 54, or patterns selected by setting No. 25. In case of operation linked with MICREX (or PROFIBUS), those times can be changed from MICREX (or PROFIBUS).For details of acceleration/deceleration pattern selection, refer to the section (pp. 4-24 to 25) of description of setting items.

② Resonance point jump function

For avoiding a resonance by operation frequency of mechanical system, the resonance point jump function can be set with up to 3 points. Also, the jump width can arbitrarily be set.This system is configured as a single phase inverter, and therefore, the jump width can be set in order to avoid the operation at 1/2 frequency of commercial frequency.

INR-HJ5235-E－－

⑤ Voltage regulator (AVR)

The deviation of estimated voltage Vout from voltage command value V* is subjected to proportional computation (P) and integration computation (I), and the computed values are added as PI computation.The action when the output has attained a limit value is different between PI computation and IP computation.At PI computation, the I output is limited to (limit value - P output) or, at IP computation, the I output is limited to a limit value.The proportional band and integration time which are parameters of PI computation can be changed from the touch panel, dedicated loader .

F*

Setting filter

-+

-

（Ｐ）

+

+

（Ｉ）

Ｉq

Active currentlimitation

Zero hold

Vout

④ Magnetic flux command computing element

The operation efficiency can be enhanced according to a load status by changing the magnetic flux command from V/F constant control.

Basic V/F pattern

Ratedvoltage

Base frequency

Suppose No. 20 is 100% setting, voltage command at 1/2 frequency is (1/2)2 = 25%.

0

×

Magnetic fluxcommand

V*

1/2 base frequency

1-8

INR-HJ5235-E－－

⑥ Current limit regulator

If an output current has exceeded the setting, the frequency command and voltage command are changed to prevent the output current from increasing.If this regulator is validated, an increase of a load at a constant speed operation (at drive) lowers the operation frequency, thereby lowering the motor speed of revolution.

+

-

Current limit command

Output current detection

Output limitation

Overcurrent computation

Setting filterAcceleration/deceleration

computing element

+

-

Output frequency command

Magnetic flux command

Output update

1-9

Input frequency command

INR-HJ5235-E－－

⑦ Operation/stopping sequence control (LSS)

The start time sequence is such that an external operation condition input gets ready the circuit breaker ON which, in turn, initiates an initial charge. Circuit breaker answer input, charge end signal and other conditions met make the control ready to receive a frequency command.

Undervoltage detection level

External electrical condition input

Electrical condition end output

Circuit breaker ON

DC voltage detection

Circuit breaker ON condition end output

Circuit breaker ON end answer-back input

Operation start input

Frequency setting input reception

Motor speed

T2: Fixed timer (0.5 sec)

6 to 8 seconds from circuit breaker ON to charge end

ON timing is from external operation condition input to

immediately before operation start

RD

ERD

RNMC

Di_RUN

Ｄｏ

Ｄｉ

Signal

Signal

In-run output SS

From timing when all operation conditions are met

Inverter cell inside thyristor firing

T1: Charge check timer (setting No. 116)T1 T2

1-10

INR-HJ5235-E－－

⑧ Current regulator (ACR)

3-phase AC current (without neutral point connection) has 2 degrees of freedom. Therefore, at least 2 current regulators (ACR) are required.In the FRENIC4600FM5d series, vector calculation is performed and the current regulation of 2 components (DC values) of active current/reactive current is carried out by the 32-bit RISC processor.

When the system has become ready for operation, active/reactive current command values, ACR zero hold release command and other control parameters are input from the main CPU.The output current values detected, on the other hand, are subjected to 3 - 2 phase conversion and vector rotation to convert from AC to DC values (active/reactive current detection values), which are input to each ACR.This active current regulator output and frequency command are added, the sum is multiplied by the magnetic flux command for creating a voltage command, 2 signals output from the reactive current regulator are input to the vector computing element for carrying out the above inversion, thereby obtaining 3-phase AC commands.Based on the 3-phase voltage commands, output gate pulses are created by the voltage command shaping section and a multi-level waveform where output voltage waveforms are approximated to sinusoidal waves.

ＶＤ－/～

ＶＤ－/～

２φ/３φ

３φ/２φ

sinθcosθ

∫ω

+

-

+

-

θ

Ｉα

Ｉβ

Iu detection

Iv detection

Iw detection

To the voltage commandshaping section

ＶU*

ＶV*

ＶW*

Ｖα

Ｖβ

ＥＴ

ＥＭ

Reactive current

regulator

Reactive current

detection

Active current

regulator

Active current

detection

Active current command

Reactive current

command

ＶＤ：Vector Rotating Device

2φ/3φ: 2-phase to 3-phase converter

3φ/2φ: 3-phase to 2-phase converter

Output frequency

command

Magnetic flux command

+

+

1-11

INR-HJ5235-E－－

⑨ Overload detection operation (OL)

To prevent a motor from burning, overload detection is effected by simulatively computing temperature rises from motor current.

The differential equation for representing a heat model of motor is given below.

Ｃｄθ／ｄｔ＋ｈθ ＝Ｑ

θ ： Rise from ambient temperature

　　　　　　Ｑ： Input quantity of heat

　　　　　　Ｃ： Heat capacity of motor

　　　　　　ｈ： Coefficient of heat radiation

When Q = 0 and = 0 with t < 0, the differential equation can be solved as follows.

θ ＝Ｑ／Ｃ（１－ｅ－ｈｔ／Ｃ）

Therefore, using the square of motor current (I) as heat input in the system, we have:

×

Thus, the software detects an overload in the following block.

ＱθＩＴ

θＱPrimary lag

No 169[358] Overload continuous ratingNo.170[359] Overload setting currentNo.171[360] Overload setting time

Overload continuous rating 2

Overload detectionCurrent detection

×

Ratio to motor rated current

If No. 170[359] overload setting current is allowed to flow at t = 0, an overload is assumed after a lapse of No. 171[360] overload setting time.The overload allowance is 100% when no current flows, or 0 when an overload is detected.

The inverter has 2 overload computing functions, one for motor protection and the other for inverter protection.

Note)Set No. in [ ] is a set number when "Motor 2" is selected.

- ÷Overoadallowance

OL

Overload in-compuation output

Overload continuous rating

1-12

INR-HJ5235-E－－

⑩ Speed search function

A pickup operation function for motor during free run operation is installed. Whether to validate or invalidate the search mode when starting can be determined by the setting item.

Action in search mode

Frequency command reception

Pulse ON

Search end

Acceleration/deceleration computing element actuation

a) Search validated when starting

Time until starting as per No. 94 setting

b) Search invalidated when starting

Frequency command reception

PulseON

Search end

Acceleration/deceleration computing element actuation

1-13

INR-HJ5235-E－－

On speed search at free run restart

Free run start

Motor speed of revolution

Motor voltage

Inverter output frequency command

Inverter pulse ON command

Speed search command

AVR action command

Setting No. 115 (voltage zero detection delay timer)

5 to 10 times the motor secondary time constant

1/2 of time by setting No. 94 [Magnetic fluxsetting filter time constant]

Depends on acceleration setting time

Gradient determined by motor secondary time constant

Replace frequency command after 1/4 of time by No. 94 from pulse ON

1-14

5%

INR-HJ5235-E－－

⑪ Function of continuing operation at momentary power interruption

The function of continuing operation at momentary power interruption is installed.

Whether to validate or invalidate the continuing operation mode at momentary power interruption can be determined by the setting item.

Motor speed of revolution

Inverter output frequency command

Depends on acceleration setting time

Ｔ1 Ｔ2

ｆ1

Detection of momentary power

interruption

The following conditions is for continuing the operation when momentary power interruption occurred .

Time of momentary power interruption T1< operation continuation timer at momentary power

interruption, and

Time of momentary power interruption T1 < power failure detection timer, and

Inverter output frequency of operation at momentary power interruption f1 > Setting No.286 lowest

operation frequency at momentary power interruption

Deceleration time at momentary power interruption is determined according to deceleration time

determined by setting No. 287 and overvoltage control function (DC voltage detection value ≧ HLR

stop with rated voltage.)

Refer to pages of 4-53 to 61 for details.

T2: Restoration checking time 25ms

1-15

INR-HJ5235-E－－

⑫ Line/Inverter Changeover function

Line/Inverter Changeover function is installed.

Inverter frequency command

Inverter output current

Bypass current

Inverter output voltage

Switching from inverter operation to line operation

Synchronous switching from inverter to line command

Synchronous completion

signal

Pulse on command

T1

Possible to set synchronous accelerating time T1 by No.40 setting.Possible to select "Major fault 1" or "No fault record" for Circuit-breaker switching fault by setting No.173-2 .

Inverter circuit-breaker answer

Bypass circuit-breaker answer

Synchronous processing

Major fault 1 over 1000ms or No fault

1-16

INR-HJ5235-E－－

Inverter frequency command

Inverter output current

Bypass current

Inverter output voltage

Line/Inverter Changeover action (from line to inverter operation)

Switching from line to inverter command


signal

Pulse on command

Bypass circuit-breaker answer

Inverter circuit-breaker answer

Synchronous processing

Major fault 1 over 1000ms or No fault

Possible to select "Major fault 1" or "No fault" for Circuit-breaker switching fault by setting No.173-2 .

1-17

INR-HJ5235-E－－

⑬ PID regulation function

PID regulator output function for frequency command is installed.

1-18

＝command-FB

a

-a

b

2b

When PD regulator（Setting No.334=0）

1.37*bTd

(No.335)

-b

b

-2b

When PI regulator（Setting No.335=0）

b

b

b

b

-b

When P regulator,（Setting No.334=No.335=0）

2b

Ti

When PID regulator

b

b

b

2bTi

2b

b

b

b

b = 1/P * a

(No.334)

b = 1/P * a

b = 1/P * a

b = 1/P * a

Time

Time

Time

Time

Time

b

b

On Off

(No.334)

-b

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

2-1 Basic Unit (TYPE: CDJC1FCU-5131□)

[1] Major specifications

CPU

ROM

RAM

Serial input/output 1


Relay input

Relay output

Analog input

Analog output

Digital output


V850(32bit RISC CPU) × 3

Item

1Mbytes

1Mbytes(capacitor back-up)

RS-232C or equivalent (for loader connection)

For touch panel connection

Optical loop transmission (for connecting between inverter cells)

24V×15 points

24V×9 points

±10V×8 points

±10V×4 points

Pulse output ×8 points

Specification

2-1

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

[2] LED, SW, Connectors layout

1) Appearance of main frame CRT

2-2

CN25

CN

14

CN2

CN27

CN26

CN

9

CN

18

CN

1

CN

5C

KP

1C

N11

SW

6

SW

5

CN

10

CKP

2

CN

4

CN

3

CN

15

CN

16

LED2

LED1

CN6

CN

7

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

2) Option cards when mounted

2-3

CN6

CN25

CN

14

CN2

CN27

CN26

CN

9

CN

18

CN

1

CN

5C

KP

1C

N11

SW

6

SW

5

CN

10

CKP

2

CN

4

CN

3

CN

19

CN

15

CN

16

LED2

LED1

CN

7

DSM card<DSM>

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

[3] Connectors

Name

8 Input of control power supply (5V,15V)

number of pins RemarksApplication

CN1

CN2

CN3

CN4

CN5

CN7

CN9

CN10

CN11

CN14

CN15

CN16

CN18

CN25

CN26

CN27

2

30

30

20

9

10

10

6

8

20

20

14

2

1

1

Input of control power supply (24V)

8 bit option (1)

8 bit option (2)

Relay unit connection (PG, Ai)

Loader / External AO connection

Touch panel connection

DCCT

Line voltage / detection of instantaneous power interruption

CN6 40 Relay unit connection (DI, DO)

Analog output

Optical conversion board connection (1)

Optical conversion board connection (2)

CPU flash writer

Power supply for options

Sending multiplex optical transmission between inverter cells

Receiving multiplex optical transmission between inverter cells

DSM card etc.

DIO etc.

2-4

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

[4] Connector allocation

Pin No.

P15 +15V input (for analog)

Name RemarksFunction

1

2

3

4

5

7

8

MA

N15

P5A

M

M

0V input (for analog)

-15V input (for analog)

unassigned

+ 5V input (for digital)

+ 0V input (for digital)

ditto

6 P5A ditto

CN1 details

Pin No.

P24 +24V input (for Relay)


1

2 M24 0V input (for Relay)

CN2 details

Pin No.

AI1 Input 1 of analog frequency command (Current input) [Signal]


1

2

3

4

5

7

8

MA

MA

AI2

AI3

MA

Input 1 of analog frequency command (Current input) [common]

10V output

0V (analog)

Input 2 of analog frequency command (Voltage input) [Signal]

Input 3 of analog frequency command (Voltage input) [Signal]

Input 3 of analog frequency command (Voltage input) [Common]

6 MA Input 2 of analog frequency command (Voltage input) [Common]

CN5 details

Spare9

10

11

12

13

15

16

MA

MA

MA

0V (for analog)

Spare

Spare

0V (for analog)

Spare

0V (for analog)

14 MA ditto

17

19

20 MA

Spare

Spare

0V (for analog)

18 MA 0V (for analog)

2-5

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Pin No.

DI1 Electrical conditions (RD)


1

2

3

4

5

7

8

DI2

DI3

DI4

DI5

DI7

DI8

DI operation command (RUN)

Input of circuit-breaker answer back (52X)

Input of earth fault detection (OVG)

Input of Major fault of fans/ temperature systems (TEMPA)

DI X1

DI X2

6 DI6 Input of Minor fault of fans/ temperature systems (TEMPB)

CN6 details

DI9 DI X39

10

11

12

13

15

16

DI10

DI11

DI12

DI13

DI15

DI X4

DI X5

DI X6

DI X7

DI X9

unassigned

14 DI14 DI X8

17

19

20 30X

unassigned

Output of Major fault or Major fault 1 (ＦＴＨ or ＦＴＨ１)

18 unassigned

Selectable by setting No.254 (see page of 4-47)

DO1 Output of electrical condition ready (ERD)

21

22

23

24

25

27

28

DO2

DO3

DO4

DO5

DO7

Output of Minor fault 1 (FTL1)

DO Y1

DO Y2

DO Y3

DO Y5

unassigned

26

DO6 DO Y4

unassigned29

30

31

32

33

35

36

P24

P24

unassigned

unassigned

unassigned

unassigned

+24V output (for Relay)

ditto

34 unassigned

37

39

40

P24

M24

M24

ditto

ditto

ditto

38 M24 + 0V output ( for Relay)

DO8 DO Y6

2-6

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Pin No.



1

2

3

4

5

7

8

N15

MA


AC current detection (Iu)

AC current detection (Iu) [for sealing]

0V input (for analog)

6

-2.5V to +2.5V

-2.5V to +2.5V

CN10 details

9

10


N15

MA


AC current detection (Iw)

AC current detection (Iw) [for sealing]

0V input ( for analog)

Pin No.

Vuv Line voltage detection (Vu-v) [signal]


1

2

3

4

5

MA

Vwv

MA

Line voltage detection (Vu-v) [common]

Line voltage detection (Vw-v) [signal]

Line voltage detection (Vw-v) [common]

Control power interruption detection [signal]

6

-10V to +10V

-10V to +10V

-10V to +10V

CN11 details

MA Control power interruption detection [common]

2-7

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Pin No.

AO1 AO CH1 output


1

2

3

4

5

MA

AO2

MA

AO3

0V

AO CH2 output

0V

AO CH3 output

6

CN14 details

MA 0V

7

8

AO4

MA

AO CH4 output

0V

Pin No.

P24 +24V output ( for Relay)


1

2 M24 0V output ( for Relay)

CN25 details

Name Short circuit Operation

Switches

SW5 1-2 short circuit CN9 connection MMI selection

SW6 1-2 short circuit Run into test mode of controller

Name

Green Light when control power supply turns on.

Color Operation

LED1

LED2 Red Light when CPU is abnormal.

LEDs

Note） Setting value of SW6 is available after resetting power supply.

2-8

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Pin No.

AO1 AO CH1 output

Name Operation

1

2 AO2 AO CH2 output

CKP1 details

AO3 AO CH3 output3

4 AO4 AO CH4 output

Iu Iu current detection. Refer to the output scale to the table below.5

6 Iall Output current detection. Refer to the output scale to the table below.

P15 +15V power supply (for analog ) for checkup7

8 P5 + 5V power supply (for analog ) for checkup

N15 -15V power supply (for analog ) for checkup9

10 MA 0V power supply (for analog ) for checkup

2-9

Used for testing in our factory. You never use this connector. CAUTION

Nominal capacity[kVA]

6.0ｋV 6.6ｋV

Output voltage at inverter ratings Iu

current peak[V]

420 470 3.65500 570 4.42600 670 5.22700 780 6.09860 960 5.221000 1120 6.091200 1320 5.221400 1540 6.091600 1750 4.611800 2000 5.222100 2300 6.092360 2600 4.52

3.774.575.396.285.396.285.396.284.765.396.284.67

Output voltage at inverter

ratings output current peak[V]

－－ INR-HJ5235-E2-10

Pin No.

P3R3 +3.3V power supply (for digital) for checkup

Name Operation

1

2 P5B + 5V power supply (backup for digital) for checkup

CKP2 details

P4R5 +4.5V power supply (for digital) for checkup in conjunction with reset3

4 P5A + 5V power supply (for digital) for checkup

FA Simulation PG output (A phase)5

6 FB Simulation PG output (B phase)

M 0V power supply (for digital) for checkup7

8 M 0V power supply (for digital) for checkup

Used only for testing in our factory. Never use this connector. CAUTION

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

2-2 Optical conversion unit (Abbrev.:EOU,TYPE:CDJC1EOK-5145C(6.0kV)）

1) Optical conversion unit (CDJC1EOK-5145C(6.6kV))


Item

Gate pulse data optical transmission interface between controller and cells

Specification

Serial transmission

4Mbps

Dedicated optical cable

Serial

Transmission speed

Cable

Transmission spec.

[2] Connector layout

2-11

Name

1 Gate pulse signal for U1 cell

Number of pins

RemarksApplication

TM1

TM2

TM3

TM4

TM5

CN15

CN16

1

1

1

1

20

20

Gate pulse signal for U2 cell

Gate pulse signal for V1 cell


Gate pulse signal for W1 cell


1

For controller (ＣＴＲ) connection (1)

For controller (ＣＴＲ) connection (2)

[3] Application of connectors

CN16 CN15

TM1 TM2 TM3 TM4 TM5 TM9 TM10 TM11 TM12

TM9

TM10

TM11

TM12

1

1

1

Gate pulse signal for U3 cell



－－ INR-HJ5235-E

2–3 Local Controller (TYPE:CDJC1FCU-5150A・B)


Classification

Controller(CTR)

CPU

Serial input 1

Serial input 2

Serial input 3

DC voltage detection input

NTC input

Digital input

Digital input

V850(32bit RISC CPU) × 1

Item

RS232C or equivalent (for loader)

Gate pulse optical transmission

Optical loop transmission (for connection between inverter cells)

2 points

2 points

DC24V×3 points

Pulse output × 9 points

Specification

2-12

[2] SWs and connectors layout

DANGER

CN1

CN

2

CN3

CKP

1SW

3C

N4

TM1 RM1 RM2

TBM

TBN

TBP

SW1

VPM VNM LNK PWM PON ERR RUN

SW

4

SW2

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

[3] Connector and terminals

Name

8 For control power supply input and thyristor gate pulse

Number of pins RemarksApplication

CN1

CN2

CN3

CN4

TM1

RM1

8

16

8

1

1

For unit inside DI detection and NTC

For gate pulse output

For loader connection

Sending multiplex optical transmission between inverter cells

Receiving multiplex optical transmission between inverter cells

For software installation

1 For DC voltage detection [P side]TBP

1 For DC voltage detection [M side]TBM

1 For DC voltage detection [N side]TBN

Pin No.

P24 +24V input


1

2

3

4

5

7

8

M

P24

M

PDOWN

P24

0V input

+24V input

0V input

For detection of power supply voltage drop

+24V input

For thyristor gate pulse output

6 M 0V

CN1 details

Pin No.

Spare


1

2

3

4

5

M

DCFUSE

M

NTC

0V

For detecting DC FUSE blown

0V

For detection of cooling fins temperature

6 M 0V

Fault if open

CN2 Details

RM2 1 Receiving pulse signal optical transmission

7 NTC2 For detection 2 of cooling fins temperature

8 M 0V

2-13

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

[4] Rotary SW name

Note) Setting value of SW1 is activated after resetting power supply.

Name/Setting

0 Spare

Operation

SW2

Switches

1 U1 cell inverter selection

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

0 - F

U2 cell inverter selection

V1 cell inverter selection

V2 cell inverter selectionW1 cell inverter selection

W2 cell inverter selection







Spare

Pin No.

P24 +24V output


1

2

3

4

5

7

8

P24

P24

P24

Q2-2 gate pulse signal

+24V output


+24V output

+24V output


6 Q4-2 gate pulse signal

CN3 details

9

10

11

12

13

15

16

14

P24

P24

P24

P24

+24V output


+24V output


+24V output

+24V output



SW3,4 For testing in our factory

2-14

SW3 and SW4 are only for testing in our factor. Never use these SWs. CAUTION

SW1

D

E

F

6.0kV specification 10kV specification

Spare

0

1













Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare





Spare

6.0kV specification



Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Inverter cell inside element names

AC2

AC1

Q1-2

Q2-2

Q3-2

Q4-2

Q1-1

Q2-1

Q3-1

Q4-1

Ｐ sideMain circuit voltage

VPM

VNM

IGBT1 IGBT3

IGBT4IGBT2

D2D1

N sideMain circuit voltage

Pin No.

P3R3 For +3.3V power supply checkup

Name Operation

1

2 P5 For + 5V power supply checkup

CKP1 details

VREF10 For +10V power supply checkup3

4 M For 0V power supply checkup

DO01 DO CH1 output5

6 DO02 DO CH2 output

DO03 DO CH3 output7

8 DO04 DO CH4 output

RST Resetting output9

10 M For 0V power supply checkup

Only used for testing in our factory. Never use this connector.

Name

Green Light when control power supply switch ON (light when +5V power supply is +4.75V or more)

Color Operation

RUN

ERR Red Light when CPU is abnormal.

LEDs

PON Red Light when pulse ON.

LNK Red Light when multiplex optical transmission between inverter cells is abnormal.

VPM Red Light when Ｐ side main circuit voltage is 15V or more.

VNM Red Light when N side main circuit voltage is 15V or more.

PWM Red Light when gate pulse signal optical transmission is abnormal.

2-15

CAUTION

CAUTION

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Item

Over voltage ground detection signal receiving card(Optical receiving card for power supply loess earth fault detection type)

Description

Over voltage ground

detection signal

250kbps

Special optical cable

Pulse signal

Transmission speed

Use cable

Transmission spec.


NameNumber of pins Application

4 For testing in our factoryCN1

[3] Connector

60 For ＣＴＲ connectionCN28

2-16

1 Over voltage ground detection signal optical receivingRM22

CN28RM22

CN11

2-4 Over voltage ground detection signal receiving card (Abbreviated as ORC,TYPE:EP4947AC1) [Optinal]


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

2-5 PSB cards（Abbreviated as PSB,TYPE:CDJC1PSB-5142A [Optional]

[1] Major specificationsIt is a board which communicates the slave by PROFIBUS-DP V0 and V1.

Item

PROFIBUS transmission interface

Description

PROFIBUS 9.6, 31.25, 45.45, 93.75, 187.5, 500, 1500, 3000, 6000, 12000kbit/s

PROFIBUS-DP V０、V1

Transmission speed

Protcol


[3] Connector

NameNumber of pins RemarksApplication

CN2

CN3

CN5

CN10

IC７

30

9

8

2

40

For controller (ＣＴＲ) connection

For PROFIBUS transmission cable connection

For testing in our factory

For PROFIBUS side power supply connection


It connects it with CN25 of CTR, 24V

FG 1 For fraem ground connection

2-17

CN

2

CN5

IC7

RUN

S0S1

S2

CN

3 CN10

FG

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Pin No.

unassigned


1

2

3

4

5

7

8

RxD/TxD-P

VP０V

RxD/TxD-N

unassigned

Sending and receving signal (+)

unassigned

0V power supply (for digital)

unassigned

Sending and receving signal (-)

6 VP５V + 5V power supply (for digital)

CN3 details

9 unassigned

Pin No.

VP24A +24V power supply (for Relay)


1

2 VP０A 0V power supply (for Relay)

CN10 details

Name

Green Light when PSB cards is oprateing.

Color Operation

RUN

S0 Red

It is shown that making to the parameter is an incomplete end. At the time of a high-speed blinking (every about 0.5 seconds):

The PSB card is abnormal. At the time of a low-speed blinking (every about one second):

The PSB card memory is abnormal.

LEDs

S1 Red Light when a configulation isn't finished.

S2 Green Light when it is shown to be exchanging data.

2-18

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

D-SUB 9PIN

Connector fixation screw

A) When node is used on the way

Terminator switch(Use it by turning off. )

B) When you use the beginning node or the terminal node

The cable to the beginning edge and the terminal equipment (equipment with which only one cable is connected) connects the figure below with a left terminal A1 and the terminal B1 toward(①), and turns on the terminator switch of the connector(②).

As for connected node, PLC and the terminal node usually become the beginning nodes with the equipment such as active terminators because of all equipment connected with not only the PSB card equipped with the inverter but also PROFIBUS.

ToA1,B1

FromA2,B2

②Terminator switch

Make it to turning on for the PROFIBUS terminal.

Two is connected and use the cable by turning off because it is not a terminal when you go to other equipment such as active terminators and optical converters.

①The cable is connected with a left terminal A1 and the terminal B1.

[3] Connected connector externals explanation (Type:6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0)

2-19

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

2-6 MICREX Transmission Unit (Abbreviated as DSM,TYPE:EP4385C1) [Optinal]


CN

19

CN

20

Item

MICREX transmission interface(DLA to D-LINE/IFC to D-LINE/T-LINK)

Description

Serial transmission

500kbps

Twisted pair cableKPEV-SB 0.5sq × 1 pair

Half-duplex, Serial transmission

Transmission speed

Cable

Transmission spec.

Name Number of pins Application

3

Screw terminals for D-LINE/T-LINK transmission cable connection

CN19

30 For controller (CTR) connectionCN20

1

Pin No.

2

3

Description

Signal line 1

Signal line 2

Shield wire

Note:

Either blue or white line of cable may be

connected to signal lines of 1 and 2.

2-20


[3] Connector

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

CN

1

TB

1

SW

1 S

W2SW11

CN5

NameNumber of pins Application

3

Screw terminal for twist cable connection with shield

TB1


8 Loader connection (For soft installation)CN5

For Modbus connection Be short-circuited when you use the Modbus transmission.SW1

SW2 Spare

Built-in terminator living Make the best use of a built-in terminator when this option card becomes a terminal on the transmission line.SW11

1 2

31 2

3

1 2 3

1-2 short circuit

2-3 short circuit For POD connection Be short-circuited when you use the POD.

1-2 short circuit

2-3 short circuit Built-in terminator no living

2-21

Item

Modbus transmission interface(DLA to D-LINE/IFC to D-LINE/T-LINK)

Description

Serial transmission

2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400bps

Twisted pair cable

Half-duplex, Serial transmission

Transmission speed

Cable

Transmission spec.

2-7 Modbus Transmission Unit (Abbreviated as MOD,TYPE:EP4930C1) [Optinal]


Protocol Modbus RTU (ASCII mode is unsupported.)

1

Pin No.

2

3

Description

Signal line (+)

Signal line (-)

Shield wire

[3] Connector


[4] SW name

Name Setting Operation Remarks

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

2-8 Expanded DIO cards (Abbreviated as DIO,TYPE:OPC-VG7-DIO）［Optional］


Item Description

Input 24V, 4 points (3mA)

24V, 8 ponts (50mA max)

CN

1

CN

2

SW

1

SW

2

It is possible to connect current sink (SINK) and current source (SOURCE.)Output

Name Number of pins RemarksApplication


36 For DIO connectionCN2

Name

SINK/SOURCE changeover

Application Remarks

SW1

SW2 DIOA/DIOB changeover Use by fixing DIOA.

2-22


[3] Connectors

[4] SWs

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

CN2

1,6

45

32

X11X12X13X14CM

CM

Xn

0V

24VSINK

CM

Xn

24V

0VSOURCE

Switching over DI between SINK and SOURCE with SW1

13Y11

14Y12

15Y13

16Y14

17Y15

31Y16

32Y17

33Y18

18CME

or

24VCN1CN4

CN25

Note: Plugs and Housing are attached. Plugs (Type; 10136-3000VE Sumitomo 3M 36 pins) Housing (Type; 10336-52F0-008 Sumitomo 3M 36 pins)

2-23

[5] Connector allocation

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

2–9 Analog Output Unit (Abbreviated as AO,TYPE:EP4454C2) [Optional]


Each analog data is output by setting analog output data code (see pages of 5-1 to 4) tooutput selection setting number.Output of each channel is output to both a jack and a connector.

J1P

CN4 CN3

Connectionto Loader

Connection toBasic Unit

CN1

2-24

J1M

J2P

J2M

J3P

J3M

J4P

J4M

Item

±10V, ４ points, insulated output （Note: ０Ｖ is common.）

Description

Analog output

[2] Jacks and Connectors layout

[3] Jacks and Connectors

Jack output Connector output Remarks

Setting Number

CN1(1) Setting No.229J1P

Channel

AO data 5

AO data 6

AO data 7

AO data 8

CN1(3)J2P

CN1(5)J3P

CN1(7)J4P

0V common CN1(2) to (8)J1M to J4M

Outputselection No. Gain Offset

Setting No.242 Setting No.243

Setting No.230 Setting No.244 Setting No.245



－－－

[4] Attention when connecting itInsert the connector on the controller side of the inverter at the end when you connect the analog output unit and the loader. Separate from the controller side connector first when you separate.

Basic Unit

CN

7

Analog Output Unit

CN4 CN3 Loader

CAUTION

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

2–10 Relay Unit (Abbreviated as RY,TYPE:RKJW1YXK-1173A - D)

[1] Appearance of Relay Unit

Name Number of pins

RemarksApplication

20CN5

40CN6

27 Terminal block for wiringTB1



For ＣＴＲ connection (for Ai)

For ＣＴＲ connection (For DI, DO)

CN

5

CN

6

TB1TB2

TB3

ＤＯ contact capacity・ Contact outputSignal name Relay typeＦＴＨ、ＦＴＬ、ＥＲＤ、Ｙ１、Ｙ２、Ｙ３Ｇ２Ｒ－２Ａ（OMURON）Contact capacity AC250V 5A DC30V 5A at resistance load

AC250V 2A DC30V 3A at inductive load

Signal name Relay typeＳＳＲ（Option：Ｙ３ and exclusive use）ＡＱＣ１ＡＤ１－２４Ｖ（MATSUSHITA）Contact capacity DC60V 1A at resistance load

・Transistor outputSignal nameＹ４、Ｙ５、Ｙ６Transistor output current 50mA

24V power supply capacity for use Terminal between 7-21・・・・３３０ｍＡ or less

Power supply for variable resistance Terminal between 37-38・・・・ Variable resistance 1 to 5ｋΩＤＣ１０Ｖ、１０ｍＡmax

ER

DFTHFTL

Y1

Y2

Y3

SSR

2-25

[2] Connectors and terminals

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

To Basic UnitCN5

To Basic UnitCN6

CM

Xn

0VRy

24V

CME

Yn

0V Ry

24V

2-26

5

11Spare

0V4

10

3

9

Spare

Spare

0V

0V

1

7Spare

0V

13AI1 (Current input)

0V

6

38AI2 (Voltage input)

0V

18

Frequency command, PID command etc.

40V Ry

23

OVG

TEMPA

TEMPB

24

5

14+24V

35

Y4

4

FTL1 17

3

Y1 16

6

ERD 19

5

FTH or FTH1 18

Electrical condition ready

Major fault 1 output

Minor fault 1 output

Selection DO1

TB2 TB1

CN

5

0V12

2

8Spare

0V2

Y2 15

1

Y3 14

Selection DO2

Selection DO3

CN

6

23

9

22

8

24

X1

X2

X3

X4

0V Ry

Function selection DI

10

11

25

52X

RUN

0V Ry

Circuit breaker answer back

DI operation command

12

26RD

0V Ry

Electrical condition ready 1

39AI3 (Voltage input)

0V

19

3710V

TB3

TB3

1

21

20

X5

X6

0V Ry

Y534

28

8 ERD

29

9 FTH or FTH1

30

10 FTL

31

11 Y1

32

12 Y2

33

13 Y3


Output of Major fault or Major fault 1

Output of Minor fault 1

Selection DO1

Selection DO2

Selection DO3

Function selection DO

2X7

22X8

3X9

Function selection DI

6

25

0V Ry

13

27

Electrical condition ready 2

RDElectrical condition 1

Major fault of FTS

Minor fault of FTS

Earth fault orTransformer overheat

Major fault

27

7

26

52X

RUN

0V Ry

Circuit breaker answer back

DI operation command

Y615

[3] Terminal block allocation

(By setting No.254)

*FTS: fan and temperature system

7+24V

210V Ry

(By setting No.254)

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

When mounting and removing the touch panel on or from the inverter, after turningoff the main circuit and the control power supply switch and check the light-outof the touch panel without fail, perform the work.

Indication

LED Display

LCD（Liquid Crystal） Display

RUN-LED

Keys

3-2 Explanation for using KEY, LED and LCD

3-1 General

The touch panel has simplified functions of those of the loader, and moreover, is added with some functions which are not built in the loader.The touch panel has such major functions as referring and changing inverter setting data, referring ※AIO and DIO, indication data, sending/receiving data with PROFIBUS, D-LINE and T-LINK, operation stop, referring fault codes, ※fault records and internal data when faults occur.

A mark “※”shows that only touch panel has such functions.

Indicating comments or data etc. All screens indicate descriptions for operation keys in the lowest line. (Scrolling）

Maximum 5 lines×13 characters

7 segments 4 figures

While the inverter is operated, lighting while Pulse-On.

Remark

5 lines ×13 characters

Green

Name

LCD（Liquid Crystal）Display

RUN-LED

Appearance of Touch Panel

Normally display Frequency actuality values (Hz).“Err.” is indicated when faults occur.When PRG key is pressed for 2 seconds, indicating a address number to jump.

7 segments 4 figures

LED Display

3-1

CAUTION

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

3-3 Functions of Touch Panel Keys

Key Function

By pressing this key, return to the monitor display which is the initial indication when power switch was ON. By keeping to press for 2 seconds or more, switch to changeover mode to jump to optional display number. (LED with 7 segments blinks)

Shift the figure to change to the right by one figure (Cursor) when changing setting data and display number. When the figure to change is at the most right side, it is rolled to the most left side.

Display of touch panel returns to the upper step by one.Faults are reset when faults have occurred. (on fault indicating screen, or monitor screen）

Increasing one datum when changing setting data and indication number. Moving the cursor inversion line to upper line (mode selection, setting classification selection.)Moving the display number to the upper number by one (the number decreases.)

Decreasing one datum when changing setting data or indication number.Moving the cursor inversion line (mode selection, setting classification selection) to the lower line.Moving the indicating number to the lower number by one (the number increases.)

Defining (Saving) data when changing data or indication number. Defining the cursor inversion line (mode selection, setting classification selection) and moving to the lower step by one.

Operating forward drive with the digit (no Polarity) +FWD when operating from the touch panel. Pressing this during reverse revolution drive to turn to forward drive with the same speed.

Operating counter revolution drive with the digit (no Polarity) +REV when operating from the touch panel. Pressing this during forward revolution drive to turn to reverse revolution drive with the same speed.

Stopping with STOP key when operating from the touch panel (Loader.)However, this key is invalid when operated by command from transmission Di or Ai.

3-2

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

3-4 Explanation on the touch panel display screen

Monitor screen: Indication when turning on power supply. Jumping from arbitrary screen using PRG key.Indicating the present inverter command and detection. Using ∧,∨ keys, screen changes.

Menu indication：M01 SET DATA :Setting items (※No. 001 to 379), No. 999 (only when no setting)M02 DIO :Indicating ON/OFF of DI and DO (※No. 381 or larger)

□：OFF, ■：ONM03 AIO :Indicating input/output voltage of Ａｉand ＡＯ.M04 ACTUAL VAL :Indicating the inverter internal data (※No.400 to)M05 TRANSMIT. :Indicating PROFIBUS, D-LINE and T-LINK transmission and

sending/receiving data (※No.600 to)M06 RUN/STOP :Operation from the touch panelM07 CONDITION :Indicating the start-up condition. (※No.380)M08 FAULT LIST :Indicating the up-date fault code

Maximum: 20 factors (※No.901- 920)M09 FAULT HIS. :Indicating 100 data of the past fault codes in chronological order.M10 TRIP DATA :Indicating the inverter command and detection data

:when fault has occurred. (Each data shows 1 point)M11 AUXILIARY :Auxiliary functions such as Setting date and time,

Utilization hours, Setting control, Software type, Liquid Crystaladjustment, Indication Test, Automatic Test. etc.

M12 AUTO TUNE. :For testing functions in our factory.

1/2 screen

Abbrev. Name Unit

F* Frequency command Hz

F* A Output frequency Hz

IDET Current detection A

VEST Output voltage estm. Ｖ

Overload Over load allowance %

Vdc DC voltage detection V

Pout Inverter output power kW

2/2 screen

A mark “※”shows that You can directly refer the relevant number with direct jump.(See page of 3-11 for using procedure.）

3-3

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

3-5 Change diagram on the Touch Panel Display Screen (1/5)

Monitor screen

∧,∨:Switching

monitor 1/2,2/2

8) Fault screenDisplay Date, Fault quantity

Menu screen

∧,∨:Selection

of M01 to M12

1) Setting screen・ Setting classification∧,∨: Classification selection

"1"0 0

Pressing for 2 seconds or more on the arbitrary

screen

Fault

Occurrence of Fault on arbitrary screen.

E r r .

No indication of Err. After fault reset

Jump to indication screen of each No.

（To B）

LED blinking

After fault reset

Fault Reset when fault has occurred

2)DIO display・ＤＩＯ No. list

∧,∨: No. selection

・ Setting No.


・ Setting display

∧,∨: Next setting

・Setting change

∧,∨: Data change

>>: Figure movement

of cursor

When selecting no

setting

Jump to a number not

yet sepecified

Save

Cancel

・ＢＩＴ display

∧,∨: Scroll

To next page

3)AIO display・AＩＯ No. list


・AIO [V] display

∧,∨: No. movement

4)Internal data display・ No. list


・Internal data display

∧,∨ No. Movement

A

B

No.381 to 387 No.401 to 499

No.001 to 379No.999

Fault Reset when fault

has occurred

Pressing on the arbitrary screen

3-4

Monitor screen

∧,∨:LED Data change

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

5) transmission data

・Classification list

∧,∨: Classification

selection

6) Operation

・ Operation monitor

screen

・No. list


・ Operation monitor

screen

∧,∨,>>：Frequency

setting change

A

B

・Data display


・ＢＩＴ display

∧,∨: Scroll

・RAS display


RAS selection

"1"000LED flicking

To next page

C

D

Forward revolution Drive

Reverse revolution

Drive

When establishing start-up conditions

No.600 to 799

Operation Cancel

LED indication：Frequency setting

Frequency settingInput mode

Change diagram on the Touch Panel Display Screen (2/5)

3-5

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

7) Start-up condition

・BIT display

∧,∨: Scroll

C

DTo next page

E

F

8) Fault screen

Date and Time, Fault

numerical quantity

display

・Fault display

・No. list


・ Fault item display


No.380

No.901-920

9) Fault history

・ Fault code, Date

display

∧,∨:Scroll

10) Trip Data,

・Date and Time,

Fault numerical

quantity display

・ Data display

・BIT display

∧,∨: Scroll


3-6

※The fault histories are registered up to 100. When the number of fault history registration exceeds 100, it is overwrited from an old history.

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

11) Auxiliary screen

, Auxiliary menu

∧,∨: Selection

E

F

・ Change of Date

∧,∨,>>： Change of

Date

Save

Cancel

・ Change of hour

∧,∨,>>：Change of

Date and Time

Save

Cancel

Operating ： Turn on the control power supplyRunning ： Pulse ON 52X ： Input power Breaker

Save：DDC→Setting Save in Touch PanelLoading： Touch Panel →Setting Loading in DDCComparison： Data Comparison （Comparison Stop at the point of different data and comparison restart-up with FUNC/DATA keys）

・ Save screen

・ Loading Screen

・ Comparison screen

・ Displaying Software

type

・ Date and Hour of

Software preparation

G

H

12) Auto tuningﾞ

∧,∨: Selection



Start-upBreaking

3-7

③ Utilization

・Displaying

52X On Time

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

⑦ Indication test

・Test patterns

display


G

H

⑥ Liquid crystal

adjustment

・ The present

concentration

indication

・ Liquid crystal

concentration change

screen

∧､∨ Data change

Cancel

Save

⑧ Automatic testing

・ No. indication

∧,∨： Selection




⑨ Maintenance

・Indication

3-8

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

3-6-1 Setting Reference and Change from Touch Panel (1)

Menu screenＭ０１セッテイＭ０２　ＤＩＯＭ０３　ＡＩＯＭ０４ＡＣＴＩＡＬ　ＶＡＬ∧,∨：Selection of M01to M12

Monitor screenInitial screen

Setting Classification

Screen

Setting Classification Screen

ＪＵＭＰ　ＦＲＱ．ＶＯＬＴ．ＳＥＴＴＩＮＧＦＬＵＸ　ＢＯＯＳＴ∧,∨： Setting Classification selection

Setting list screen００１　ＣＯＭＭＥＲＩＣＡＬ００２　ＲＡＴＥＤ００３　ＢＡＳＥ００４　ＭＡＸＩＭＵＭ∧,∨： Setting No. selection

Touch Panel Menu Screen

Move the inverse line using ∧,∨keys to MO1 setting, andPress FUNC/DATA key.

Setting List Screen

Key operationScreen Name Screen example: LCD screen

Press PRG key on an optional screenOptional screen

Press FUNC/DATA key on monitor screen.

Move the inverse line using ∧,∨keys, andselect setting classification,then, press FUNC/DATA key.

Move the inverse line using ∧,∨keys, and after selecting a line which you need change, press FUNC/DATA key.

Continue into next page・・・

Setting classification is shown in setting details (page of 4-13)This screen is used only for heading up the setting No. list on next screen indication. Therefore, no problem when you go to next screen, if necessary.

Monitor screenＦ＊　　　　０．０ＨｚＦ＊　Ａ　　０．０ＨｚＩＤＥＴ　　０．０ＡＶＥＳＴ　　　　０Ｖ∧,∨:Switching monitor 1/2, 2/2

Optional screen

3-6 Explanation Example of Operation on Touch Panel

００３　ＢＡＳＥ

ＦＲＱ．　ＳＥＴＴＩＮＧ

Ｍ０１　ＳＥＴ　ＤＡＴＡ

3-9

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

００３　ＢＡＳＥＦＲＥＱＵＥＮＣＹ

０．１～　１２０．０　　　　　ＸＸＸ．Ｘ　Ｈｚ

Setting Data Indication screen

Setting Reference and Change from Touch Panel (1) continued from the previous page

Key operationScreen Name Screen example: LCD screen

Press FUNC/DATA key to go into Change screen.

When you refer the setting data, you complete here.

Setting Date Change screen

As one place of LCD become inversed, Change data using ∧,∨ key, and ＳＨＩＦＴ key. （No changeable other than setting range）

Inversing place moves with SHIFT key. With ∧ key, inverse digit increases by one. With ∨ key, inverse digit decreases by one.

Save

Note: When you know the setting number to change previously, you can easily operate by directly jumping to setting (indication) number in next page (2).

Press FUNC/DATA key to save data changes.Press RESET key to cancel change, if necessary.

Cancel

When change of data, When pressing ∧ key in case that the relevant place is 9, the upper place increases by 1 and the relevant place become 0. When pressing ∨ key in case that the relevant place is 0, the upper place decreases by 1 and the relevant place become 9.

3-10


０．１～　１２０．０　　　　　ＸＸＸ．■　Ｈｚ

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Setting Reference and Change from Touch Panel (2), Direct Jump, continued from the previous page

Key operationScreen Name

Screen example: Upper side shows LED indication Lower side shows LCD screen

Keep to press PRG key for 2 seconds or more on an optional screen.

Optional screen Optional Screen

Monitor ScreenＦ＊　　　　０．０ＨｚＦ＊　Ａ　　０．０ＨｚＩＤＥＴ　　０．０ＡＶＥＳＴ　　　　０Ｖ∧,∨:Data change

"０" ００

Monitor screen

As 7 segments LED flicking, change 7 segments LED to setting number desirable using ∧, ∨ and SHIFT keys. （It is possible to change from 0 to 999）

Flicking digit moves with SHIFT key.Flicking digit increases by one using ∧ key.Flicking digit decreases by one using ∨ key.

2 seconds or more

Monitor ScreenＦ＊　　　　０．０ＨｚＦ＊　Ａ　　０．０ＨｚＩＤＥＴ　　０．０ＡＶＥＳＴ　　　　０Ｖ∧,∨:Data change

００"３"

Monitor screen

Setting Data Indication screen

Setting Data Change screen

（One digit of ＬＣＤflicking）

After changing 7 segments LEDs to the setting number desirable, press FUNC/DATA key to jump to the setting data indication screen.（Jumping is invalid if the number can not be indicated ）

Note: It is possible to jump to any screen allocated with indication number other than setting .

Press FUNC/DATA key to move Setting Change Mode.

When you refer the setting data, you complete here.

As data on LCD flick, change data using ∧ and ∨ keys and ＳＨＩＦＴ key.

Move flicking digit with SHIFT key.With ∧ key, flicking digit increases by one.With ∨ key, flicking digit decreases by one.

Press FUNC/DATA key to save change.

Save

Cancel

One digit of LED flicking

One digit of LED flicking

０．０

０．０

０．０

3-11


０．１　～　１２０．０　　　　　ＸＸＸ．Ｘ　Ｈｚ


０．１～　１２０．０　　　　　ＸＸＸ．■　Ｈｚ

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

3-6-2 Operation from Touch Panel

Monitor ScreenＦ＊　　　　０．０ＨｚＦ＊　Ａ　　０．０ＨｚＩＤＥＴ　　０．０ＡＶＥＳＴ　　　　０Ｖ∧,∨:Switching monitor 1/2,2/2

Menu ScreenＭ０５　ＴＲＡＮＳＭＩＴ．

Ｍ０７　ＣＯＮＤＩＴＩＯＮＭ０８　ＦＡＵＬＴ　ＬＩＳＴ∧,∨： Selection of M01 to M12

Monitor screen

Menu screen

Move the inverse line using ∧ and ∨keys to M06 RUN/STOP screen and press FUNC/DATA key.



Press PRG key on an optional screen and press FUNC/DATA key on monitor screen.

Operation ScreenＳＴＡＲＴ　Ｏ．Ｋ．Ｆ＊　　　　０．０ＨｚＦ＊　Ａ　　０．０ＨｚＩＤＥＴ　　０．０Ａ

Operation monitor screen

Check the indication of START O.K., andPress FUNC/DATA key.

When START N.G. is displayed, see start-up condition in No.380 and clear the impossible condition.

Press ∧,∨ and >> keys, change LED indication to desirable revolution number.

For Forward revolution Drive : Press FWD key.For Reverse revolution Drive : Press REV key.

Operation ScreenＲＵＮＮＩＮＧＦ＊　　　５０．０ＨｚＦ＊　Ａ　５０．０ＨｚＩＤＥＴ　３０．０Ａ


Operation Monitor screenPress STOP key, if desirable to stop.

０．０

０．０

０．０

０ "５" ０．０

５０．０

Forward

Reverse


Ｍ０６　ＲＵＮ／ＳＴＯＰ

3-12

Operation ScreenＳＴＡＲＴ　Ｏ．Ｋ．Ｆ＊　　　　０．０ＨｚＦ＊　Ａ　　０．０ＨｚＩＤＥＴ　　０．０Ａ

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

3-6-3 Referring to Fault Codes on Touch Panel when faults have occurred.

Fault screenＦＡＵＬＴ　ＴＩＭＥ

２００６－０４－０５１１：１２：１３

　　　　　ＮＵＭＢＥＲ　２

Display No.Fault code Abbr.９０１４８　ＰＷＲＬ９０２３１　ＬＩＮＫ

Initial screen when Fault occurring

Faults List Screen List for fault code and abbreviation in history is indicated.Using ∧ and ∨ key, select the fault to see details. When numerical quantity of simultaneous fault is 5 or more, scroll to next screen using ∧ and ∨ key.



Turn an optional screen to fault screen by self-action due to occurrence of a fault. Moving to lower screen by one using FUNC/DATA key.

Press RESET key when resetting faults. If fault causes have cleared, reset is carried out and Err. light out.

Note: If the time of the clock shifts, fault occurrence date also shifts.

９０２　Ｎｏ．０２ＣＯＤＥ　３１　ＬＩＮＫＯＰＴＩＣＡＬ　ＬＩＮＫＥＲＲＯＲ

Fault has occurred on an optional screen.

Err. Flicking

Err. Flicking

To watch after reset,Press FUNC/DATA key on monitor screen and select M08 fault cause.And then press FUNC/DATA key.

( Err. LED is no flicking)

Err. Light out

　Ｅ　ｒ　ｒ .

　Ｅ　ｒ　ｒ .

　Ｅ　ｒ　ｒ .

Fault code, abbreviation and name are displayed.

When you reset the fault, it is possible to reset it on the fault screen (the top screen) after removing fault causes. Therefore, press RESET key twice to move the top screen, and moreover, press RESET key to reset the fault.

９０２３１　ＬＩＮＫ

3-13

－－ INR-HJ5235-E4-1

4-1List of Control Parameter Setting (No.1 to No.379) A set parameter has something with cannot the change and set (display) a condition during the operation. It describes in the table below. Setting which cannot be changed during operation ‥‥ It is × in the update column at the operation. Setting which synchronizes with a certain setting and becomes possible change ‥‥ It is setting No. and a condition value in the setting condition column which can be set.

Chapter 4 Setting data

Setting Data List (1/12)

1 50 , 60

2 0.1 to 200.0

3 0.1 to 200.0

4

0.1 to 200.05

0.1 to 200.06

0.10 to 99.997

0.0 to 200.08

0.1 to 200.09

0.1 to 200.010

0 to 211

12

0 to 313

0.1 to 200.014

0.1 to 200.015

0.1 to 200.016

0.0 to 10.017

0.0 to 2.018

100 to 999919

0.0 to 100.020

0.1 to 200.021

0.0 to 100.022

0.0 to 100.023

0.0 to 400.024

0 to 999925

0.00 to 20.0026

27

28 0 to 2

29 0.1 to 5500.0

30 0.1 to 5500.0

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

points

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

V

%

Hz

%

%

%

ms

%

s

s

No.13≧1

No.13≧2

No.13≧3

No.13≧1

Commercial frequency

Rated frequency

Base frequency

Startup frequency

Shutdown frequency

Minimum frequency

Bias frequency

Forward rotation inching frequency

逆転寸動周波数

Rotating direction selecting

Spare

Jumping number of resonance point

Jumping frequency 1

ジャンプ周波数２

ジャンプ周波数３

Jumping width

Jumping width 2

Rated output voltage

Output voltage square reducing ratio

Magnetic flux boosting frequency

Magnetic flux boosting amount

Weaking magnetic flux boosting amount

Startup magnetic flux boosting time constant

Magnetic flux setting filter initial value

Spare

Acceleration/deceleration pattern

Acceleration/deceleration time 1 T1


100% frequency

Correspond to rated slip

Commercial jumping width

0.1 to 200.0 ×HzOperating maximum frequency

Reverse rotation inching frequency

Jumping frequency 2

Jumping frequency 3

No. Setting RangeUpdate in Operation

UnitSetting

ConditionItem Remarks

Startup magnetic flux boosting amount

－－ INR-HJ5235-E4-2


34 0.1 to 5500.0

35 0.1 to 200.0

36 0.1 to 200.0

37 0.1 to 200.0

38 0.1 to 200.0

39 0.1 to 5500.0

40 0.1 to 5500.0

41 0.00 to 10.00

42

43

44 0 to 1

45 0.1 to 5500.0

46 0.1 to 5500.0

47 0.1 to 5500.0

48 0.1 to 5500.0

49 0.1 to 5500.0

50 0.1 to 5500.0

51 0.1 to 200.0

52 0.1 to 200.0

53 0.1 to 200.0

54 0.1 to 200.0

55

56 0 to 1

60 0.1 to 200.0

61 0.1 to 200.0

62 0.1 to 200.0

63 0.1 to 200.0

s

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

s

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

×

×

64 0.1 to 200.0 Hz

59 0.1 to 200.0 Hz

58 0.1 to 200.0 Hz

57 0.1 to 200.0 Hz

No.28≧1

No.28≧1

No.28≧1

No.28≧1

No.28≧1

No.28=0

No.44=1

No.44=1

No.44=1

No.44=1

No.44=1

No.44=1

No.44=1

No.44=1

No.44=1

No.44=1

No.56=1

No.56=1

No.56=1

No.56=1

No.56=1

No.56=1

No.56=1

No.56=1

33 0.1 to 5500.0 s No.28≧1

0: disable, 1: enable

0: not selected, 1: selected


Broken point frequency 1 F1




Abrupt deceleration time

Deceleration time for synchronization

S type Acceleration/deceleration time

Spare

Spare

Acceleration/deceleration switching enable











Spare

Multistage frequency selecting

Forward rotation frequency 5




Reverse rotation frequency 2





31 0.1 to 5500.0 s

32 0.1 to 5500.0 s




UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E4-3


67 0.1 to 200.0

68 0.1 to 200.0

69 0.1 to 200.0

70 0.1 to 200.0

71 0.00 to 1.00

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

90

91

92

94

95

96

97

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

s

98

93

No.56=1

No.56=1

No.56=1

No.56=1

No.56=1 Wait for DI switching time





Command matching timer

0 to 4

0 to 1

0.0 to 999.9

10.0 to 999.9

-100.0 to 100.0

0 to 2

0.0 to 999.9

ms

%

%

ms

×

×

×

No.73≧1

No.73≧1

No.73≧1

No.73≧1

No.73≧2

No.73≧2

10.0 to 999.9

-100.0 to 100.0

0 to 2

0.0 to 999.9

10.0 to 999.9

-100.0 to 100.0

0.1 to 200.0

0.0 to 110.0

0.0 to 110.0

0 to 2

0.1 to 100.0

%

%

ms

%

%

Hz

%

%

%

×

×

No.73≧2

No.73≧2

No.73≧4

No.73≧4

No.73≧4

No.73≧4

No.73≧1

No.73≧1

No.73≧1

No.73≧1

No.73≧1

None/1ch/2ch/1,2ch/2,3ch

0: None,1: Light fault2 (keep), 2:Heavy fault2

Spare

AI frequency command selecting

AI frequency command 1 operation selecting AI frequency command 1 filter time constant

AI frequency command 1 gain

AI frequency command 1 offset

AI frequency command 2 operation settingAI frequency command 2 filter time constant



AI frequency command 3 operation selectingAI frequency command 3 filter time constant



AI frequency command dead zone

AI frequency command restriction+

AI frequency command restriction-

AI frequency command operation selecting at abnormalAI frequency command abnormal detecting level

Spare

1 to 16

0 to 9999

0 to 9999

0 to 9999

0.1 to 999.9

2 to 9999

order

ms

ms

ms

%

ms If setting 9999ms, P-amp will operate.

Order of frequency setting filter

Frequency setting filter time constant

Magnetic flux setting filter time constant

AVR command filter time constant

Spare

AVR regulator proportional band

AVR regulator integration time

65 0.1 to 200.0 Hz

66 0.1 to 200.0 Hz

No.56=1

No.56=1




UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E4-4


0 to 1

0.00 to 99.99

0.0 to 100.0

s

%

×

No.121=1

No.121=1

0.0 to 100.0

0.00 to 20.00

0.00 to 20.00

10.0 to 200.0

0 to 2

%

%

%

%

×

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

DC braking selection

DC braking timer

DC braking current value

Spare

Spare

Spare

Reactive current command gain

Primary resistor compensation gain

ON delay compensation

Motor current ratio

ACR expansion selection

0.0 to 399.9

0.0 to 399.9

0.0 to 999.9

80.0 to 120.0

0.0 to 100.0

%

%

ms

%

%

0.1 to 999.9

2 to 9999

0.00 to 5.00

0.60 to 99.99

2.00 to 99.99

0 to 9999

0 to 9999

%

ms

%

s

s

ms

ms

0 to 9999 ms

for motor rating

for motor rating

Active current limitation2 (braking)

Output current limitation

Output voltage detection compensation filter time constantOutput voltage detection compensation gainOutput voltage detection compensation switching frequency

Spare

Current limitation regulator proportional bandCurrent limitation regulator integration timeCurrent limitation regulator output limitation

Spare

Spare

Voltage 0 detection delay timer

Charge check timer

SS ON delay timer

AVR ON delay timer

AVR OFF delay timer

Spare

0: None, 1: Select2: Simple sensor-less vector control disable

101 0.0 to 399.9 % for motor ratingActive current limitation2 (driving)

99

100

0.0 to 399.9

0.0 to 399.9

%

%

for motor rating

for motor rating

Active current limitation (driving)

Active current limitation (braking)


UnitSetting


Spare

Spare

0.0 to 399.9 % for motor ratingOutput current limitation(drawing)

－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-5

135 12.6 to 999.9

136 1.0 to 999.9

137 0.0 to 160.0

138 12.6 to 999.9

139 0.0 to 399.9

140 12.6 to 999.9

141 0.0 to 160.0

142 12.6 to 999.9

143 12.6 to 999.9

144 0.0 to 160.0

145 5.0 to 120.0

146 0.0 to 120.0

147 500 to 9000

148 0.0 to 100.0

149 0.0 to 100.0

150

151

152

153

154

0000 to 1111

155

0000 to 1111

156

0000 to 1101

157

0000 to 0123

158

0000 to 1111

159

0000 to 1110

160

161

162

163

164

165

%

ms

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

Hz

%

%

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

166

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

Active current regulator proportional bandActive current regulator integration timeActive current regulator output restrictionReactive current regulator proportional bandReactive current regulator proportional limitationMotor axis compensation regulator proportional bandMotor axis compensation regulator output limitationActive current limitation regulator proportional bandAxis compensation regulator proportional bandAxis compensation regulator restriction

Slip restriction

λrestriction

Carrier frequency

Lσ compensation factor

PWM modulation switching voltage

Spare

Software SW1

Software SW2

Software SW3

Software SW4

Software SW5

Software SW6

Spare

1 to 16

200 to 11000

0 to 3

kVA

×

×

×

for 6.6kV: 10Inverter multiplex order

Inverter rating capacity

Cell rating voltage selection

00 to 11 ×Cell software SW1

0.00 to 10.00 % No.132≧2Voltage boosting amount

0.1 to 200.0 Hz No.132≧2Voltage boosting frequency

0.0 to 999.9 ms No.132≧2Reactive current detecting HPF filter time constant

0.0 to 200.0 % No.132≧2Reactive current restriction level

12.6 to 999.9 % No.132≧2Reactive current restriction regulator proportional band

0.0 to 110.0

0.00 to 99.99

%

ms

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

133

134

Output voltage compensation gain

Current command filter time constant


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E4-6


0 to 1

1100 to 3343

1000 to 4000

1.0 to 99.9

0.1 to 200.0

0.1 to 400.0

0.1 to 60.0

0 to 99

1 to 800

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 1

12.6 to 999.9

1.0 to 999.9

0.1 to 200.0

0 to 3

0 to 9999

0.0 to 100.0

0.0 to 100.0

s

Hz

%

s

Station

Word

%

ms

Hz

%

%

×

×

×

×

×

×

No.172=1

No.172=1

No.172=1

No.172=1

No.172=1

No.172=1

DSM card mounted

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

167

0: None, 1: Select

D-Line: 1 to 7, T-Link: 0 to 99D-Line: 1 to 63, T-Link: 400 or 800

Fault expansion selection

Fault level selection 1

Fault level selection 2

Middle fault shutdown timer

Startup hang-up detection frequency

Startup hang-up detection current level

Startup hang-up detection time period

Spare

DSM slave address

DSM received data quantity

Internal send data selection 1



Internal send bit selection 1



Action selection at transfer error

Active current regulator for speed search proportional bandActive current regulator for speed search integration timeForward/reverse revolution decision frequency

Action at speed search abnormal

Retry restriction for speed search

Frequency initial setting value at speed search abnormal (+side)Frequency initial setting value at speed search abnormal (-side)

Spare

0 to 1 ×Setting selection for testing Cleared to "0" at control power supply "off"

0 to 1

10.0 to 399.9

11.0 to 400.0

%

%

10.0 to 999.9 s

1: ProtectProtection for setting data

Spare

Motor overload continuous rating

Motor overload setting current

Motor overload detecting time period

DSM card orPSB card mounted










0.1 to 5500.0

0.1 to 5500.0

s

s

Transmission inching acceleration time

Transmission inching deceleration time

Spare


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


0.0 to 999.9

0.0 to 999.9

12.6 to 999.9

1.0 to 999.9

0.0 to 399.9

12.6 to 999.9

1.0 to 999.9

0.0 to 399.9

12.6 to 999.9

1.0 to 999.9

0.0 to 399.9

0.0 to 100.0

0.0 to 30.0

0.0 to 999.9

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

%

ms

%

%

ms

%

%

ms

%

%

s

%

No.200=1

No.200=1

No.200=1

No.200=1

No.200=1

No.200=1

No.200=1

No.200=1

No.200=1

No.200=1

No.200=1

No.200=1

No.200=1

No.200=1

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

227

229

231

232

233

226

228

230

201

Test expansion level 1


R1 tuning reactive current regulator proportional bandR1 tuning reactive current regulator integration timeR1 tuning reactive current regulator limitationR1 tuning active current regulator proportional bandR1 tuning active current regulator integration timeR1 tuning active current regulator limitationReactive current tuning regulator proportional bandReactive current tuning regulator integration timeReactive current tuning regulator limitationReactive current tuning starting conditionReactive current tuning start delay timerReactive current tuning pass/fail distinction level

AO data 1 (internal)




AO data 5 (external)




4-7

0.0 to 999.9

0.0 to 999.9

No.200=1

No.200=1



0.0 to 999.9

0.0 to 999.9

No.200=1

No.200=1



0.0 to 999.9 No.200=1Test expansion level 7

Spare

00 to 11

00 to 11

0 to 6

-400.0 to 400.0 %

No.200=1

No.200=1

No.200=1

No.200=1

For automatic test 1

For automatic test 2

Signal selection for testing

Data for testing

-/-/ Pt Auto. test/Voltage generated

-/-/ Operation time clear/Fault clear

0 to 1 ×AO expansion data 0: None, 1: Select


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


-400.0 to 400.0

-400.0 to 400.0

-400.0 to 400.0

-400.0 to 400.0

-400.0 to 400.0

-400.0 to 400.0

1 to 12

0 to 1

0 to 1

times

%

times

%

times

%

times

%

times

%

times

%

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

234

235

236

237

238

239

240

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

261

262

263

264

265

266

267

Default value: 1

Default value: 0%

Default value: 1

Default value: 0%

Default value: 1

Default value: 0%

Default value: 1

Default value: 0%

Default value: 1

Default value: 0%

Default value: 1

Default value: 0%

Default value: 1

0: None, 1: Select

Default value:8(Poff)

Default value:2 (Fwd)Default value:3 (Rev)Default value:4 (FTA)Default value:5 (FTB)Default value:7 (ERST)Default value:11 (AISEL)Default value:12 (AIC)Default value:15 (JOG)

AO data 3 gain (internal)

AO data 3 offsets (internal)


AO data 4 offset (internal)

AO data 5gain (external)

AO data 5 offset (external)

AO data 6 gain (external)






AO cell temperature selection

Spare

DIO expansion setting

DI X1 function selection









DO FTH function selection

DO Y1 function selection



4-8

0 to 1

0.01 to 10.00 s

×DIFANH function Normal open/close

DIFANHL detection timer

-99.99 to 99.99

-400.0 to 400.0

times

%

-400.0 to 400.0

times

%

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1





Default value: 1

Default value: 0%

デフォルト値1倍

デフォルト値0%

Default value:3 (SS)

Default value:13 (RSTX)

Default value: 1

Default value: 0%


UnitSetting


0 to 163

0 to 163

0 to 163

0 to 163

0 to 163

0 to 163

0 to 163

0 to 163

0 to 163

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

-99.99 to 99.99

-99.99 to 99.99

-99.99 to 99.99

-99.99 to 99.99

-99.99 to 99.99

-99.99 to 99.99

-99.99 to 99.99

－－ INR-HJ5235-E


0.1 to 200.0

0.1 to 200.0

0 to 3

0.00 to 99.99

0.1 to 200.0

0.1 to 5500.0

200 to 1860

0.60 to 99.99

0.00 to 99.99

0.1 to 10.0

0 to 1

50.0 to 200.0

0.0 to 150.0

0.00 to 99.99

0.00 to 99.99

75.0 to 125.0

0 to 1

Hz

Hz

s

Hz

s

V

s

s

s

%

%

s

s

%

×

×

×

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.284≧2

No.284≧2

No.284≧2

No.293=1

No.293=1

No.293=1

No.293=1

No.293=1

No.293=1

268

269

270

271

272

273

274

275

276

277

278

279

280

281

282

283

284

285

286

287

288

289

290

291

292

293

294

295

296

297

298

0: heavy fault1, 1: pulse off, 2: continue ope.1, 3: continue ope.2

0: None, 1: Detect

0: Normal, 1: Sync. operation parallel off

Attained frequency level lower limit

Attained frequency level upper limit

Action selection at power interruption

Operation continuing timer for instantaneous power interruptionLowest frequency at power interruptionDeceleration time at power interruptionOVL voltage level at power interruptionRestart delay timer at power interruption

Detection timer for power failure

Magnetic flux command calculation time at restart after instantaneous power interruption

Spare

Line voltage detection switching

Line voltage detection compensation gainLine voltage interruption detection levelOperation continuing timer for control power interruptionDetection timer for control power failureCompensation for cell DC voltage regulation

Spare

Spare

Synchronous switchover between line and inverter selection

4-9

0 to 9999 s No.255=1Input circuit breaker answerback output OFF delay timer

0 to 1 × No.255=1DI operation command input switching

0 to 3 No.255=1Power supply normal output selection

1 to 1000 ms No.255=1Power supply normal output ON delay timer

299

300

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

×

×

×

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1




Default:21 (Lower limit of frequency )

Default:22 (Upper limit of frequency )

Default:12 (TST )


UnitSetting


0 to 3 ×Mask selection at power failure of DIFANHL

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

0.0 to 150.0 % No.293=1Line voltage interruption detection level 2

－－ INR-HJ5235-E


-65.0 to 65.0

0.1 to 60.0

5.0 to 999.9

0.0 to 50.0

5.0 to 999.9

0.0 to 50.0

13 to 9999

13 to 9999

13 to 9999

50.0 to 150.0

0.0 to 100.0

0.0 to 100.0

%

s

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

%

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

No.300=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

DIO card

DIO card

DIO card

DIO card

DIO card

DIO card

DIO card

DIO card

DIO card

DIO card

DIO card

DIO card

301

302

303

304

305

306

307

308

309

310

311

312

313

314

315

316

317

318

319

320

321

322

323

324

325

326

327

328

329

330

SW=DIOA limited

SW=DIOA limited

SW=DIOA limited

SW=DIOA limited

SW=DIOA limited

SW=DIOA limited

SW=DIOA limited

SW=DIOA limited

SW=DIOA limited

SW=DIOA limited

SW=DIOA limited

SW=DIOA limited

PLL reactive voltage command

PLL reactive voltage command calculation timePLL reactive voltage compensation regulator proportional bandPLL reactive voltage compensation regulator output limitationPLL reactive voltage compensation regulator2 proportional bandPLL reactive voltage compensation regulator2 output limitationSynchronous active current regulator proportional band

Synchronous motor axis compensation regulator proportional band Synchronous magnetic flux compensationSlip reduction rate at synchronous operation

Output reactor %X

Spare

DI X11 function selection (DIO card)




Spare

4-10

0.01 to 60.00

0.50 to 99.99

Hz

s

No.300=1

No.300=1

PLL output scale

PLL operation start delay timer

0 to 2

10.0 to 999.9 %

×

No.332≧1

0: PID off, 1: PID frequency command, 2:PID freq. add.

PID operation selection

PID proportional band

331

332

333

250 to 9999

1 to 9999

0.0 to 399.9

%

ms

%

No.300=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

PLL regulator proportional band

PLL regulator integration time

PLL regulator limitation


UnitSetting


0 to 163

0 to 199

0 to 163

0 to 163

0 to 163

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

－－ INR-HJ5235-E


0 to 9999

0.0 to 120.0

0 to 4

0 to 1

-100.0 to 100.0

0 to 1

0.1 to 200.0

0.1 to 200.0

100 to 9999

0 to 9999

0.1 to 200.0

0.0 to 100.0

0.0 to 100.0

0.0 to 400.0

0 to 9999

0.1 to 999.9

2 to 9999

0.0 to 399.9

10.0 to 399.9

11.0 to 400.0

10.0 to 999.9

ms

%

%

Hz

Hz

V

ms

Hz

%

%

%

ms

%

%

%

ms

%

%

%

s

×

×

×

×

×

10.0 to 200.0 %

%

No.332≧1

No.332≧1

No.332≧1

No.332≧1

No.332≧1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

334

335

336

337

338

339

340

341

342

343

344

345

346

347

348

349

350

351

352

353

354

355

356

357

358

359

360

361

362

363

364

% No.343=1

PID output filter time constant

PID limitation

PID command selection

PID FB selection

Touch panel PID command

Motor 2 setting enable

Motor 2 rating frequency

Motor 2 base frequency

Motor 2 output rating voltage

Motor 2 magnetic flux setting filter time constantMotor 2 magnetic flux boosting frequencyMotor 2 magnetic flux boosting amountMotor 2 attenuating magnetic flux boosting amountMotor 2 starting magnetic flux boosting amountMotor 2 starting magnetic flux boosting time constantMotor 2 magnetic flux setting filter initial value

Motor 2 AVR regulator proportional bandMotor 2 AVR regulator integration time

Motor 2 output current limitation

Motor 2 overload continuous rating

Motor 2 overload setting current

Motor 2 overload detection time period

Motor 2 motor current ratio

Motor 2 primary resistance compensation gain

Motor 2 ON delay compensation

4-11

0.0 to 100.0

0.0 to 100.0

0.10 to 99.99

%

%

Hz

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

Motor 2 reactive current command gain

Motor 2 Lσ compensation coefficient

Motor 2 lowest frequency

Spare

365

366

0.0 to 3600.0

0.00 to 10.00

0.0 to 60.0

s

s

s

No.332≧1

No.332≧1

No.332≧1

PID integration time

PID differential time

PID FB filter time constant


UnitSetting


0.0 to 399.9Motor 2 output current limitation(drawing)

0.00 ～ 20.00

0.00 ～ 20.00

0.00 ～ 20.00

－－ INR-HJ5235-E


367

4-12

Spare

Spare

368

370

371

369

372

373

374

375

376

377

378

379

No. Item Display range Unit Remarks

999 No-setting item of setting data 1 to 379 Only display

No-setting item of setting data (1/1)


UnitSetting


Spare

0.1 to 200.0

0.1 to 400.0

0.1 to 60.0

Hz

%

s

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

0.0 to 100.0 % No.343=1

Motor 2 startup hang-up detection frequencyMotor 2 startup hang-up detection current levelMotor 2 startup hang-up detection time period

Motor 2 output reactor %X

Station address

Operation selection at transmission abnormal(Modbus)

1 to 247

0 to 1

MOD card mouted

MOD card mouted

×

×

Responce interval

Transmission stop detection time

Parity bit selection

Transmission speed

0.00 to 1.00

0 to 60

0 to 3

0 to 4MOD card mouted

MOD card mouted

MOD card mouted

MOD card mouted

s

s

×

×

×

×

－－ INR-HJ5235-E4-13

Description of Setting Item List (1/60)

Specify commercial frequency. This is used for calculating humping frequency etc.

Specify motor rating frequency. This value corresponds to 100% output frequency.Adjust to the specification of the equipment or motor to drive.If specify settings beyond the specification of the equipment or motor to drive, the equipment or motor is afraid to be damaged.

If magnetic field weaking control is required, specify magnetic field weaking starting frequency.If magnetic field weaking control is not required, specify the same value as the rated frequency.

Adjust to the specification of the motor.If specify settings beyond the specification of the motor, the motor is afraid to bedamaged.

Specify the minimum operation frequency in inverter operation.In case that it is operated using digital signal such as transmission, command value will increase up to this frequency if specifying a value other than "0".

Specify the minimum frequency at inverter shutdown.When shutdown is directed, the equipment will shutdown after the frequency command calculation value decreases up to this setting value.

1 50 , 60

2 0.1 to 200.0

3 0.1 to 200.0

5 0.1 to 200.0

6 0.1 to 200.0

7 0.10 to 99.99

×

×

×

×

×

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

Commercial frequency

Rated frequency

Base frequency

Startup frequency

Shutdown frequency

Minimum frequency

100% frequency

Specify the value corresponding to motor rated slip frequency.

No.1 to 11： Setting items on frequency

Touch panel setting class display: "FRQ. SETTING"

Specify the maximum operation frequency in inverter operation.If operation maximum frequency is greater than setting No.2 rated frequency, specify the operation maximum frequency to the same value as the rated frequency.

4 0.1 to 200.0 ×HzOperating maximum frequency

4-2 List of Detailed Control Parameter Setting (No.1 to 379)

CAUTION

CAUTION


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-14

This determines the minimum operation frequency in low speed area. Operation method differs depending on setting No.11 Rotating direction selecting and setting No.165-3 Ai frequency bias switching selection.

Bias frequency setting is determined from frequency command input direction of external operation command "Input" state. Operation distinction depends on No.86 in case of analog frequency command, but bias frequency operation is started by specifying a value other than "0" in case of the other operation.

0No.86 (Analog dead zone)

No.86 (Analog dead zone)

External frequency command

Speed calculator input(Internal frequency command)

External frequency setting (Forward)

External frequency setting (Reverse)

Frequency setting (Forward)

Frequency setting (Reverse)

Internal frequency command


0

0


Ai frequency commandDi frequency command



8 0.0 to 200.0 ×HzBias frequency


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-15

Bias frequency setting is determined from frequency command input direction of external operation command "Input" state. Operation distinction depends on No.86 in case of analog frequency command, but bias frequency operation is started by specifying a value other than "0" in case of the other operation.

0



External frequency command

Speed calculator input(Internal frequency command)



Frequency setting (Forward)


0


Frequency setting (Reverse)


0 Ai frequency commandDi frequency command

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Specify a frequency corresponding to inching signal (FJ, RJ) via transmission from MICREX.In case of operating in DI mode, the frequency setting becomes the value corresponding to DI<No.2: FWD>, <No.3: REV>input. Select function selection setting (No.256 to 264, 319 to 322) of X1 to X9, X11 to X14 as DI assignment separately.


4-16

9 0.1 to 200.0

10 0.1 to 200.0

Hz

Hz



11 0 to 2 ×Rotation direction selecting

Specify the rotating direction of analog frequency command operation, DI up/down operation mode, touch panel operation and PID operation (except transmission operation).

Setting = 0: Both Forward and Reverse rotation is enabledSetting = 1: Forward rotation onlySetting = 2: Reverse rotation only


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E4-17


External operation command

DI function selection <No.2: FWD>

DI frequency command Forward

Reverse



Reverse



Reverse

-100%

Frequency command is restricted with "0" and don't rotate in reverse.



DI function selection <No.3: REV>



Select function selection setting (No.256 to 264, 319 to 322) of X1 to X9, X11 to X14 as DI assignment separately.

－－ INR-HJ5235-E4-18




DI frequency command HLR output

Forward

Reverse



Reverse



Reverse

-100%

Frequency command is restricted with "0" and doesn't rotate in reverse.


Reverse

100%Set HLR output

Set HLR output

"0" at stop

DI frequency command HLR output

Forward

Reverse

Set HLR output

-100%

100%

Reverse

ForwardDI frequency command HLR output






Select function selection setting (No.256 to 264, 319 to 322) of X1 to X9, X11 to X14 as DI assignment separately.

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Specify jumping number to avoid mechanical resonant operation.Up to 3 points of setting is possible. Jumping in commercial frequency is always executed regardless the setting value. If this setting is "0", items from No.14 to 17 are not displayed on touch panel and dedicated loader and cannot be referred or updated.

Specify jumping frequency to avoid mechanical resonant operation.Setting is possible depending on the point number specified in setting No.13.

Specify jumping width of resonance point jumping.All the three jumping width is in common.

０Output frequency setting


Resonance point jumping 1



Jumping width

If resonance jumping is specified, the operation is restricted as above when frequency setting value is within resonance point, but output frequency command varies continuously via speed calculator and the equipment operates at another point out of resonance point. (If acceleration/deceleration time is set as short time value, the output frequency command will also change abruptly.) Both forward and reverse rotation jump at the same frequency point.

Other than above, jumping operation of setting No.18 jumping width 2 corresponding to a half frequency of the commercial frequency is executed.

13 0 to 3

14 0.1 to 200.0

15 0.1 to 200.0

16 0.1 to 200.0

17 0.0 to 10.0

18 0.0 to 2.0

×points

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

No.12≧1

No.12≧2

No.12≧3

No.12≧1

Jumping number of resonance point

Jumping frequency 1

Jumping frequency 2

Jumping frequency 3

Jumping width

Jumping width 2Commercial jumping width

Specify the jumping width as that of a half of the commercial frequency.


No.13 to 18： Setting items on jumping frequency

Touch panel setting class display: "JUMP FRQ."

Jumping frequency 1

Jumping frequency 2

Jumping frequency 3

4-19


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


19 100 to 9999

20 0.0 to 100.0

V

%

Rated output voltage

Output voltage square reducing ratio

This item is to specify rated voltage for output. This value means 100% output voltage. Adjustt this value to motor specification.If a setting beyond the motor specification is specified, the motor may be damaged.

This setting item is to attenuate magnetic flux command comparing the basic V/F pattern. Higher efficiency operation of the motor is possible depending the motor loading condition by setting this function.


Output voltage command

Base frequency Rated frequency

Square reducing pattern is acquired by specifying the setting value as 100%.

Proportional pattern is acquired by specifying the setting value as 0%.

No.19 to 20： Setting items on voltage

Touch panel setting class display: "VOLT.SETTING"

4-20

CAUTION


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

25 0 to 9999 msStartup magnetic flux boosting time constant

This setting item is to intensify magnetic flux command at startup comparing the basic V/F pattern. This corresponds to forcing at startup, and is used together with setting No.24.


100%

Magnetic flux command pattern

0

Depress magnetic flux boosting

Magnetic flux boosting

Startup magnetic flux boostingMagnetic flux command

No.22

26 0.00 to 20.00 %Magnetic flux setting filter initial value

Specify magnetic flux setting filter initial value.


4-21

21 0.1 to 200.0

22 0.0 to 100.0

Hz

%

Magnetic flux boosting frequency

Magnetic flux boosting amount

Specify the frequency when increasing motor output torque. Input a frequency up to base frequency.When output frequency is "0", torque in low speed area is intensified by adding attenuation amount to become "0" to basic magnetic flux command from boosting amount of setting No.22.

This setting item is to intensify magnetic flux command comparing the basic V/F pattern. Magnetic flux in low speed area is intensified by using magnetic flux boosting frequency setting together.

No.21 to 26： Setting items on magnetic flux boosting

Touch panel setting class display: "FLUX BOOST"

23 0.0 to 100.0

24 0.0 to 400.0

%

%

Weaking magnetic flux boosting amount

Startup magnetic flux boosting amount

This setting item is to intensify magnetic flux command in operation with weaking magnetic flux comparing the basic V/F pattern.

This setting item is to intensify magnetic flux command at startup comparing the basic V/F pattern. This corresponds to forcing at startup.


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


28 0 to 2

29 0.1 to 5500.0

30 0.1 to 5500.0

31 0.1 to 5500.0

×

s

s

s

32 0.1 to 5500.0 s

Acceleration/deceleration pattern

Acceleration/deceleration 1 T1




These setting items are to specify patterns for acceleration/deceleration time. It is possible to select patterns for speed adjusting from No.28 to No.32 by selecting a pattern from 0 to 2. (Refer pages 24 to 25 for the detail.)

34 0.1 to 5500.0 s No.28≧1

33 0.1 to 5500.0 s No.28≧1



35 0.1 to 200.0

36 0.1 to 200.0

37 0.1 to 200.0

38 0.1 to 200.0

39 0.1 to 5500.0

40 0.1 to 5500.0

41 0.00 to 10.00

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

s

s

s

No.28≧1

No.28≧1

No.28≧1

No.28≧1

No.28=0





Abrupt deceleration time

Deceleration time for synchronization

S type Acceleration/deceleration time

These setting items are to specify values when setting No.28 acceleration/deceleration pattern is set as 1 or 2.

If DI<No.1: SYX (Emergency stop) from relay unit is OFF, or operation command SY1 of transfer bit command is OFF when cooperating with MICREX, speed is decreased based on the time specified in this item. Specify a time to decrease speed from rated frequency to "0". If <No.1: SYX> is not selected for function selection setting (No.256 to 264, or 319 to 322 of DI X1to X9, or X11 to X14, SYX is treated as same as ON input.

Specify the acceleration/deceleration time up to the frequency designated with setting No.1 (commercial frequency), in case that DI <No.31: CPS (switching input to commercial power) or <No.28: SYB (synchronous start command) is ON during operation. Select function selection setting (No.256 to 264, 319 to 322) of X1 to X9, X11 to X14 as DI assignment separately.

Specify S type time (Ts in Fig. below) in case of executing S type acceleration/deceleration. However, S type acceleration/deceleration is executed only when frequency speed adjusting pattern setting No.28 is "0", and operation executed under <RUN>+<No.2: FWD>, <No.3: REV> of DI up/down in DI notch, or executed from touch panel.

v'

v'/2

Ts

Frequency F

Ts Time T

Ts/2/T1

T1

T1+Ts

Ts: S type time T1: Speed adjusting timeRated

frequency

No.28 to 41： Setting items on speed adjusting

Touch panel setting class display: "ACC./DEC."

4-22


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

44 0 to 1

45 0.1 to 5500.0

46 0.1 to 5500.0

47 0.1 to 5500.0

48 0.1 to 5500.0

49 0.1 to 5500.0

50 0.1 to 5500.0

51 0.1 to 200.0

52 0.1 to 200.0

53 0.1 to 200.0

54 0.1 to 200.0

s

s

s

s

s

s

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

×

No.44=1

No.44=1

No.44=1

No.44=1

No.44=1

No.44=1

No.44=1

No.44=1

No.44=1

No.44=1

0: disable, 1: enableAcceleration/deceleration switching enable











Specify this item to "1" so as to make setting No.45 to 54 settable.If this item is set to "0", items from setting No.45 to 54 are not displayed on touch panel or dedicated loader, and cannot be referred or updated.

These items are used when acceleration/deceleration slant 2 (<No.22: HLR2> in DI) is selected, DI (<No.20: MOT2>) ON, or acceleration/deceleration pattern 2 (setting No.28=2) is selected. (Refer to pages 4-24 to 25 for the detail.)Select function selection setting (No.256 to 264, 319 to 322) of X1 to X9, X11 to X14 as DI assignment separately.

No.44 to 54： Setting items on speed adjusting 2

Touch panel setting class display: "ACC./DEC. 2"


4-23


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Ｔ１Ｔ２

Ｔ３Ｔ４

Usual

Reverse

Ｔ７Ｔ８

Ｔ９Ｔ１０Forward

Reverse

Acceleration/deceleration 2 is selected (Setting No.44=1 and

DI <HLR2>=ON or DI <MOT2>=ON)

T1

UsualForward

T3T2

F1

F2

T4 T5 T6

F3

F4

Symmetrical as for Reverse

Acceleration/deceleration 2 is selected

(Setting No.44=1 and DI <HLR2>=ON or DI <MOT2>=ON) T7

Forward

T9T8

F5

F6

T10 T11 T12

F7

F8


100% frequency

-100% frequency

100% frequency

-100% frequency

100% frequency

100%frequency


4-24

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Operation at setting No.44=1 T1

Forward

T3T2

F1

F2

T7 T9 T10

F5

F7


100% frequency

F3F4

T4 T5 T8

F6

*Note: Since T7 to T11 are not defined yet at setting No.44=1, acceleration/deceleration of pattern "0" is performed forcibly.

56 0 to 1 × 0: None, 1: SelectMultistage frequency selecting

Specify this item to "1" so as to make setting No.57 to 71 settable.If this item is set to "0", items from setting No.57 to 71 are not displayed on touch panel or dedicated loader, and cannot be referred or updated. If this item is set to "0", items from setting No.57 to 71 operate with default.

60 0.1 to 200.0

61 0.1 to 200.0

62 0.1 to 200.0

63 0.1 to 200.0

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

64 0.1 to 200.0 Hz

59 0.1 to 200.0 Hz

58 0.1 to 200.0 Hz

57 0.1 to 200.0 Hz No.56=1

No.56=1

No.56=1

No.56=1

No.56=1

No.56=1

No.56=1

No.56=1

65 0.1 to 200.0 Hz

66 0.1 to 200.0 Hz

No.56=1

No.56=1

Default: 40.0Hz

Default: 50.0Hz

Default: 60.0Hz

Default: 70.0Hz

Default: 10.0Hz

Default: 30.0Hz

Default: 20.0Hz

Default: 10.0Hz

Default: 20.0Hz

Default: 30.0Hz











67 0.1 to 200.0

68 0.1 to 200.0

69 0.1 to 200.0

70 0.1 to 200.0

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

No.56=1

No.56=1

No.56=1

No.56=1

Default: 40.0Hz

Default: 50.0Hz

Default: 60.0Hz

Default: 70.0Hz





Specify each frequency [Hz], if multistep frequency operation (max. 8 stages) are performed.If setting No.56 is set to "0", items from setting No.57 to 71 cannot be specified and operate with default.

For operating in multistep frequency, forward frequency 1 to 8 and reverse frequency 1 to 0 can be selected by specifying setting No.160=x0xx and No.165=xx0x, and inputting to <RUN> of DI and to <No.2:FWD>, <No.3:REV>, <No.16:MNB1>, <No.17:MNB2> or <No.18:MNB3> of DI. Select function selection setting (No.256 to 264, 319 to 322) of X1 to X9, X11 to X14 as DI assignment separately.

No.56 to 71： Setting items on multistep notch frequency setting

Touch panel setting class display: "NOTCH FRQ."


T11

F8

4-25


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

71 0.00 to 1.00 s No.56=1 Default: 0.10sCommand matching timer

MNB2

0

0

1

1

MNB2 MNB1 Frequency settingForward inching

frequency 1

Forward freq. 2

Forward freq. 3

Forward freq. 4

Frequency settingReverse inching

frequency 1

Reverse freq. 2

Reverse freq. 3

Reverse freq. 4

MNB1

0

1

0

1

<FWD> + <RUN> + <REV> + <RUN> +

No.

10

64

65

66

No.

9

57

58

59

MNB3 MNB3

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

Forward freq. 5

Forward freq. 6

Forward freq. 7

Forward freq. 8

Reverse freq. 5

Reverse freq. 6

Reverse freq. 7

Reverse freq. 8

67

68

69

70

60

61

62

63

1

1

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

0

1

Selection of frequency command turns over after settling of command fluctuation in order to prevent ON/OFF switching errors of DI MNB1,2,3.


Frequency setting selection via DI <MNB1>, <MNB2> and <MNB3>

4-26

0 to 4

0 to 1

×

× No.73≧1

73

74

None/1ch/2ch/1,2ch/2,3chＡＩ frequency command selecting

ＡＩ frequency command 1 operation selecting

Specify a value one or more into this setting item to make No.74 to 90 settable.If this item is set to "0", items from setting No.74 to 90 are not displayed on touch panel or dedicated loader, and cannot be referred or updated. If this item is set to "1" to "4", AI to be used is turned over..This setting = 1: Use AI frequency command 1 only, This setting = 2: Use AI frequency command 2 only,This setting = 3: Use AI frequency command 1 and 2, This setting = 4: Use AI frequency command 2 and 3.

Select AI frequency command 1 operation.Input/AI command

This setting = 0: 4 - 20mA / 0 -100%This setting = 1: 4 - 20mA / 100 - 0%

No.73 to 90： Setting items on AI frequency command setting

Touch panel setting class display: "AI-FRQ."

0.0 to 999.9

10.0 to 999.9

ms

%

No.73≧1

No.73≧1

75

76

ＡＩ frequency command 1 filter time constant

ＡＩ frequency command 1 gain

Specify input filter time constant of ＡＩ frequency command 1.

Specify ＡＩ frequency command 1 gain. Setting the gain to 100%, the command specifies 4 - 20mA / 0 - 100%.

-100.0 to 100.0 % No.73≧177 ＡＩ frequency command 1 offset

Specify offset amount of ＡＩ frequency command 1.


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-27

0 to 2

0.0 to 999.9 ms

× No.73≧2

No.73≧2

10.0 to 999.9

-100.0 to 100.0

%

%

No.73≧2

No.73≧2

78

79

80

81

AI frequency command 2 operation setting

AI frequency command 2 filter time constant



Select operation of AI frequency command 2. Input / AI command

This setting = 0: 0 - 10V / 0 - 100%This setting = 1: ±10V / ±100%This setting = 2: 0 - 10V / 100 - 0%

Specify offset of AI frequency command 2.

Specify input filter time constant of AI frequency command 2.

Specify gain of AI frequency command 2. Setting the gain to 100%, the command specifies 10V / 100%.

0 to 2

0.0 to 999.9

10.0 to 999.9

ms

%

× No.73≧4

No.73≧4

No.73≧4

82

83

84

AI frequency command 2 operation setting

AI frequency command 3 filter time constant


Select operation of AI frequency command 3. Input / AI command

This setting = 0: 0 - 10V / 0 - 100%This setting = 1: ±10V / ±100%This setting = 2: 0 - 10V / 100 - 0%

Specify input filter time constant of AI frequency command 3.

Specify gain of AI frequency command 3. Setting the gain to 100%, the command specifies 10V / 100%.

-100.0 to 100.0

0.1 to 200.0

0.0 to 110.0

%

Hz

%

No.73≧4

No.73≧1

No.73≧1

85

86

87


AI frequency command dead zone

AI frequency command restriction+

Specify offset of AI frequency command 3.

Specify dead zone of ＡＩ frequency command (output is "0" if this input is equal this setting or less).This setting is used commonly for AI frequency command 1,2, and 3.

Specify restriction+ of ＡＩ frequency command. This setting is used commonly for AI frequency command 1,2, and 3.

0.0 to 110.0 % No.73≧188 AI frequency command restriction-

Specify restriction- of ＡＩ frequency command. This setting is used commonly for AI frequency command 1,2, and 3.


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-28

0 to 2

0.1 to 100.0 %

× No.73≧1

No.73≧1

89

90

0: None, 1: Light fault2 (keep), 2: Heavy fault2

AI frequency command operation selecting at abnormal

AI frequency command abnormal detecting level

Specify operation of ＡＩ frequency command at abnormal. This is used commonly for AI frequency command 1,2,3.This setting = 0: No abnormality detectedThis setting = 1: Light fault2 (display only), keeping frequency settingThis setting = 2: Heavy fault2 (stopping pulse off)

Specify AI frequency command abnormal detecting level. This is used commonly for AI frequency command 1,2,3.When AI frequency command abnormal detecting level is set to enable (No.89 = 1 or 2) , it is made abnormal if AI frequency command changes beyond this setting value during 10ms.

92 1 to 16

93 0 to 9999

94 0 to 9999

95 0 to 9999

order

ms

ms

ms

Order of frequency setting filter

Frequency setting filter time constant

Magnetic flux setting filter time constant

AVR command filter time constant

Specify the order of frequency setting filter.

Specify frequency setting filter time constant. This is specified in order to decrease shock at the time of changing setting frequency.

Specify a value corresponding to motor magnetic flux alteration.By specifying a value corresponding to motor secondary time constant or larger, control stability is acquired. Specify a larger setting value than that acquired from (L2+Lm)/r2.

Specify filter time constant of AVR command. Intend to stabilize the control by suppressing voltage command fluctuation in weaking magnetic field control operation.

No.92 to 95： Setting items on filter setting

Touch panel setting class display: "FRQ. FILTER"


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


97 0.1 to 999.9

98 2 to 9999

99

100

101

102

%

ms

0.0 to 399.9

0.0 to 399.9

0.0 to 399.9

0.0 to 399.9

%

%

%

%

If setting 9999ms, P-amp will operate.

for motor rating

for motor rating

for motor rating

for motor rating

AVR regulator proportional band

AVR regulator integration time

Active current limitation (driving)

Active current limitation (braking)

Active current limitation2 (driving)

Active current limitation2 (braking)

Proportional band of voltage control system: P (%) = x 100％.

Adjust to a optimal value during spot adjusting.

１

Proportional gain

Specify the limitation of inverter output active current for driving side and braking side separately.The narrower value is adopted for active current limitation by comparing this setting value and the calculated value from No.103 (or No.357 if No.343 Motor2 setting enable is set to "1" and DI <No.20: MOT2> is input) and No.128 (Reactive current command gain). Specify a value comparing for motor rating.Active current limitation calculation ＝ √（No.103２－No.128２）

Adapt this value to the operating motor or equipment specification.If a setting beyond the motor or equipment specification is specified, the motor or equipment

may be damaged.

103 0.0 to 399.9 % for motor ratingOutput current limitation

The narrower value is adopted for active current limitation by comparing this setting value, the calculated limitation value from No.128 (Reactive current command gain), and above setting value of No.99, 100, or No.101, 102. Specify a value comparing for motor rating.Active current limitation calculation ＝ √（No.103２－No.128２）When DI <No.20: MOT2> is input as No.343 Motor2 setting enable is set to "1", this setting is not used, andNo.357 (Motor2 output current limitation is enabled.

Adapt this value to the operating motor or equipment specification. If a setting beyond the motor or equipment specification is specified, the motor or

equipment may be damaged.

Specify the limitation of inverter output active current for driving side and braking side separately.The narrower value is adopted for active current limitation by comparing this setting value and the calculated value from No.103 (or No.357 if No.343 Motor2 setting enable is set to "1" and DI <No.20: MOT2> is input) and No.128 (Reactive current command gain). Specify a value comparing for motor rating.In order to make this specified current limitation active, input into either of the following:

・input into DI <No.21:LMT2>・input into DI <No.20: MOT2> as No.343 Motor2 setting enable is set to "1".

Select function selection setting (No.256 to 264, 319 to 322) of X1 to X9, X11 to X14 as DI assignment separately.Adapt this value to the operating motor or equipment specification.

If a setting beyond the motor or equipment specification is specified, the motor or equipment may be damaged.

Specify integration time of voltage control system.Adjust to a optimal value during spot adjusting as well as proportional band.

No.97 to 103： Setting items on AVR

Touch panel setting class display: "AVR"

4-29

CAUTION

CAUTION

CAUTION


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-30

104

105

106

0.0 to 999.9

80.0 to 120.0

0.0 to 100.0

ms

%

%

Output voltage detection compensation filter time constant

Output voltage detection compensation gain

Output voltage detection compensation switching frequency

Specify filter time constant of output voltage detection compensation .

Specify gain compensation of output voltage detection (estimate value).Output voltage decreases in the direction of setting value: "large".Output voltage increases in the direction of setting value: "little".

Specify switching level of output voltage detection (estimate value) used for AVR control.AVR control by motor induced voltage (estimate value) is performed if frequency command is less than this setting value, and AVR control by inverter output detection value (estimated) is performed if frequency command is larger than this setting value.

111

112

113

0.1 to 999.9

2 to 9999

0.00 to 5.00

%

ms

%

Current limitation regulator proportional band

Current limitation regulator integration time

Current restriction regulator output limitation

Specify proportional band for current limitation control system P (%) = x 100%.1

Proportional gain

Specify integration time for current limitation control system.

Specify output restriction for current limitation control regulator.

No.104 to 109： Setting items on output voltage

Touch panel setting class display: "VOLT.DET."

No.111 to 113： Setting items on current limitation

Touch panel setting class display: "I1 LIMITER"


UnitSetting


107 0.0 to 399.9 % for motor ratingOutput current limitation(drawing)

CAUTION

The start withdrawing(current limitation starting) or the restrat withdrawing(current limitation restarting) when instantaneous power interruption sets the output current limitation value.The narrower value is adopted for active current limitation by comparing this setting value, the calculated limitation value from No.128 (Reactive current command gain), and above setting value of No.99, 100, or No.101, 102. Specify a value comparing for motor rating.Active current limitation calculation ＝ √（No.107２－No.128２）When DI <No.20: MOT2> is input as No.343 Motor2 setting enable is set to "1", this setting is not used, andNo.354 (Motor2 output current limitation(draw)) is enabled.



－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-31

115

116

117

0.60 to 99.99

2.00 to 99.99

0 to 9999

0 to 9999

s

s

ms

ms118

119 0 to 9999 ms

Voltage 0 detection delay timer

Charge check timer

SS ON delay timer

AVR ON delay timer

AVR OFF delay timer

Specify output voltage "0" detection delay time. The setting is determined by the secondary time constant of the used motor. Usually, specify a value more than 5 times of the secondary time constant.

Specify charging waiting time from detecting the higher DC voltage than undervoltage level to triggering time of DC thyristor mounted on inverter cell. Set a value subtracted the charging time up to undervoltage level because about 7 seconds is required until DC voltage is charged sufficiently after circuit breaker activated.

Specify the time up to "SS" relay ON after frequency command is input. Set this item if AVR is required to activate before SS turns to ON.

Set the setting to "0"ms if no brake is furnished. Specify the time from inputting frequency command via magnetic brake release check timer to starting of AVR control.

Set the time from "SS" off to AVR zero hold. Specify the time up to complete closing of magnetic brake after "SS" (brake close command) becomes off by detecting frequency setting "0" with magnetic brake close check timer.

No.115 to 119： Setting items on timer

Touch panel setting class display: "TIMER"


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


0 to 1

0.00 to 99.99

0.0 to 100.0

s

%

×

No.121=1

No.121=1

121

122

123

DC braking selection

DC braking timer

DC braking current value

Specify this item as "1" to make setting No.122 and 123 settable.If this item is set to "0", items of setting No.122 and 123 are not displayed on touch panel or dedicated loader, and cannot be referred or updated.

Specify direct current braking time in case of stopping motor rotation by applying DC brake during inverter stop under selecting DC braking mode.

Specify braking current during DC braking timer operation under selecting DC braking mode. Specify setting current as % for No.128 (Reactive current command gain).

No.121 to 123： Setting items on direct current braking

Touch panel setting class display: "DC BRAKING"

4-32


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

0.0 to 100.0

0.00 to 20.00

0.00 to 20.00

10.0 to 200.0

0 to 2

%

%

%

%

×

128

129

130

131

132

Reactive current command gain

Primary resistor compensation gain

ON delay compensation

Motor current ratio

ACR expansion selection

Specify a ratio of exciting current to motor rating current.

Specify a percent impedance of cable resistance between motor and inverter output. Primary resistance can be calculated automatically via tuning operation.Refer to paragraph on tuning for tuning procedure.

Specify a saturated value for ON delay compensation.This compensates deficit voltage amount generated at the ON/OFF time of IGBT element.This setting value can be calculated automatically via tuning operation.Refer to paragraph on tuning for tuning procedure.

Specify a ratio of motor rating current to inverter rating current. Refer to the page otherwise specified as for inverter rating capacity and rating current (page 1-4 to 5).

Adapt this value to motor specification.If a setting beyond the motor specification is specified, the motor may be damaged.

Specify this item to "1" to make setting No.133 to 149 settable.If this item is set to "0", items of setting No.133 to 149 are not displayed on touch panel or dedicated loader, and cannot be referred or updated.In addition, if this item is set as "0", setting No.133 to 149 operate with the default value. If this item is set as "2", simple sensor-less vector control is disabled. This is used in case of output transformer attached. If this item is set as "2", startup speed search function and interruptible speed search restart function are disabled.

0.0 to 110.0

0.00 to 99.99

%

ms

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

133

134

Default: 100%

Default: 5.00ms

Output voltage compensation gain

Current command filter time constant

Specify constant gain for voltage command conversion.Change this item in usual when voltage generation is required by changing the constant to 100% on trial base.

Specify command input filter time constant for current regulator (active/reactive current regulator).

No.128 to 131： Setting items on ACR

Touch panel setting class display: "ACR"

No.132 to 149： Setting items on ACR expansion

Touch panel setting class display: "EXT.ACR"


4-33

CAUTION


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

135 12.6 to 999.9

136 1.0 to 999.9

137 0.0 to 160.0

138 12.6 to 999.9

139 0.0 to 399.9

%

ms

%

%

%

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

Default :200.0%

Default :2.7ms

Default :5.0%

Default :200.0%

Default :10.0%

Active current regulator proportional band

Active current regulator integration time

Active current regulator output limitation

Reactive current regulator proportional band

Reactive current regulator output limitation

Specify proportional band for active current control system P (%) = x 100%.1

Proportional gain

Specify integration time for active current control system.

Specify output limitation value for active current regulator.

Specify proportional band for reactive current control system P (%) = x 100%.

Specify output limitation value for reactive current regulator.

140 12.6 to 999.9

141 0.0 to 160.0

142 12.6 to 999.9

143 12.6 to 999.9

144 0.0 to 160.0

%

%

%

%

%

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

Default :150.0%

Default :20.0%

Default :400.0%

Default :500.0%

Default :0.0%

Motor axis compensation regulator proportional band

Motor axis compensation regulator output limitation

Active current limitation regulator proportional band

Axis compensation regulator proportional band

Axis compensation regulator limitation

Specify proportional band for Motor axis compensation control system P (%) = x 100%.

Specify output limitation value for Motor axis compensation regulator.

Specify proportional band for active current limitation control system P (%) = x 100%.

Specify proportional band for motor Vt axis compensation regulator P (%) = x 100%.

Specify output limitation value for motor Vt axis compensation regulator.


4-34

145 5.0 to 120.0 % No.132≧1 Default 15.0%Slip limitation

Specify output limitation value for motor slip frequency.If slip frequency increases beyond this limitation value, speed calculator stops temporally and regulates output current under motor speed adjusting.

146 0.0 to 120.0 % No.132≧1 Default :120.0%λ limitation

Specify limitaion value for AC voltage command (Va, Vb, Vc) used for PWM modulation. It is limitation to carrier triangle wave peak value with 100% setting.

1

Proportional gain

1

Proportional gain

1

Proportional gain

１

Proportional gain


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

147 500 to 9000

148 0.0 to 100.0

149 0.0 to 100.0

Hz

%

%

× No.132≧1

No.132≧1

No.132≧1

Default: 3000Hz (6.6kV output)

Default: 0.0%

Default: 3.0% (6.6kV output)

Carrier frequency

Ｌσ compensation factor

PWM modulation switching voltage

Specify carrier frequency of inverter. (Don't update factory delivery data.) Execute resetting of power source when updating the setting value. The value becomes effective after resetting power source.

Specify percent impedance of the cable between motor and inverter output.

Specify switching voltage level for inverter PWM modulation method.


4-35

150 0.00 to 10.00 % No.132=2Voltage boosting amount

This setting item is to intensify voltage command via basic V / f pattern.Voltage in low speed area is intensified by using voltage boosting frequency setting No.151 together.

151 0.1 to 200.0 Hz No.132=2Voltage boosting frequency

Specify this item to increase the voltage and motor output torque in low speed area. Input a frequency lower than base frequency. If output frequency is "0", torque in low speed area is increased by adding basic voltage command with an attenuation amount which makes this frequency to "0" using boosting amount specified by No.150 .


No.150

Voltage command pattern

0

Voltage boosting

Voltage command

No.151

152 0.0 to 999.9 ms No.132=2Reactive current detecting HPF filter time constant

Specify current detecting HPF (high pass filter) time constant for controlling reactive current oscillation suppression.

153 0.0 to 200.0 % No.132=2Reactive current limitation level

Specify limitation level for reactive current.

154 12.6 to 999.9 % No.132=2Reactive current limitation regulator proportional band

Reactive current limitation regulator proportional band P (%) = x 100%.1

Proportional gain


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

1 to 16

200 to 11000 kVA

×

×

156

157

for 6.6kV: 10Inverter multiplex order

Inverter rating capacity

Specify "10" for 6.0kV output inverter.

Specify the rating capacity of inverter. Set the capacity value indicated in the table below from the ratings capacity and the rated voltage of the inverter that uses it. This value is used to indicate current value [A] and to change the internal parameter values.

Adapt this value to motor specification.If a setting beyond the motor specification is specified, the motor may be damaged.

No.156 to 159： Setting items on inverter

Touch panel setting class display: "INVERTER"


4-36


UnitSetting


Nominal capacity[kVA]

6.0ｋV 6.6ｋV

No.157setting value

CAUTION

420 470 470500 570 570600 670 672700 780 784860 960 9601000 1120 11201200 1320 13201400 1540 15401600 1750 17501800 2000 19802100 2300 23102360 2600 26002700 3000 30363200 3500 35003780 4150 41634300 4750 4760

－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-37


UnitSetting


0 to 3 ×158 Cell rating voltage selection

Select the rating DC voltage value of cell.0: 783V (corresponding to 4000V, 6000V, 10kV input), Main circuit undervoltage level: 80% (626V). 1: 712V (corresponding to 3600V, 5400V, 9.0kV input), Main circuit undervoltage level: 80% (569V). 2: 783V (corresponding to 4000V, 6000V, 10kV input), Main circuit undervoltage level: 75% (587V). 3: 712V (corresponding to 3600V, 5400V, 9.0kV input), Main circuit undervoltage level: 75% (534V). 4: 864V (corresponding to 4400V, 6600V, 11kV input), Main circuit undervoltage level: 80% (680V). 5: 786V (corresponding to 3960V, 5900V, 9.9kV input), Main circuit undervoltage level: 80% (619V). 6: 864V (corresponding to 4400V, 6600V, 11kV input), Main circuit undervoltage level: 75% (638V). 7: 786V (corresponding to 3960V, 5900V, 9.9kV input), Main circuit undervoltage level: 75% (580V).

Spare

Spare

Inverter cell DC fuse selection1: without DC fuse, 0: with DC fuse

159 00 to 11 ×Cell software SW1

－－ DC fuse

Spare

－

－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-38

No.160 to 167： Setting items on software switch

Touch panel setting class display: "SOFTWARE SW"

Ｄｉ up/down mode operation selection 1: follow frequency control output, 0: fixed gradient

OVL operation......Operation for restraining main circuit voltage rising by reducing regenerating quantity through making frequency reduction rate to "0" in case of cell main circuit DC voltage arising more than 1600V.

Ｄi operation mode selection 1: up/down mode, 0: notch operation mode

Frequency command reverse selection 1: frequency reverse, 0: normal

Operation mode selection 1: Motor-only operataion mode, 0: MICREX cooperative operation mode

160 0000 to 1111 ×Software SW1

ERATE POFF Touch panel OVL

Speed reduction rate selection at emergency 1: usual rate, 0: abrupt frequency reduction rate

Operation selection at DI-RUN off 1: pulse off, 0: frequency reduction to stop

Touch panel, loader, POD operation selection 1: operation disable, 0: operation enable

Operation selection at OVL overvoltage 1: none, 0: frequency reduction to stop


UP-DOWN DI mode FREVM single / MICREX

Restart operation selection at medium/light fault 1: restart by fault cause rejection, 0: restart disable

ON delay compensation selection (synchronizing to) 1: current command, 0: current detection

Spare

AVR regulator operation selection 1: PI regulator, 0: IP regulator


Medium fault ON delay - AVRPI/IP


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-39

Cell control power source selection 1: feed from control PS, 0: feed from main circuit

Main circuit undervoltage operation selection 1: without UV fault detection, 0: with UV fault detection


Cell PS UV

CAUTION

Inverteroutput frequency

For "Forward rotation" the frequency command

Forward

Reverse

Forward

Reverse



Forward


Reverse

For "Reversal rotation" the frequency command

Reverse

Forward

Forward

Reverse

Forward

Reverse

Start operation selection0: Speed search start1:0Hz start2: Drawing in start (current limitation start)Note) Search at starting is disable if No.132 = 2 selected.

Drawing in start operation selection (Refer to the figure below). 0: Draw it in from this polarity of the frequency command. 1: Draw it in from a reverse-polarity of the frequency command. 2: Draw it in from this polarity of the frequency command.

(polarity reversing when drawing in failure is retried.)3: Draw it in from a reverse-polarity of the frequency command.

(polarity reversing when drawing in failure is retried.)

Start Drawing


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-40

AVR braking side limitation selection 1: calculate from grid voltage, 0: fixed (1560V)

AI frequency bias switching selection 1: selected, 0: not selected

AI / DI frequency command selection 1: AI frequency command selection, 0: DI frequency command selection

Over voltage ground detection signal input selection 1: Power supply loess optical type 0: Type in the past


AVR limitation Ai bias AISEL OVG

167 0 to 1 1: ProtectProtection for setting data

If this item is set to "1", all the setting data other than this item cannot be updated.Specify this in case of protecting the setting data.

Comment indication on touch panel 1: English, 0: Japanese

Restart selection after instant. power failure 1: restart from frequency just before pulse off, 0: speed search

Note) Search at starting is disable if No.132 = 2 selected.

Main circuit undervoltage fault selection at instant power failure 1: without detection, 0: with detection


ENGLISHPower failure

UV at Instant. power failure

Ratings excitation selection when starting 0: Start without excitation 1: Start after ratings are excitedNote) Only when No.163 = xx1x is selected, "Start after ratings are excited" become effective.

Ratings excitation


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-41

0 to 1 ×172 0: None, 1: SelectFault expansion selection

Specify this item to "1" to make setting No.173 to 178 settable.If this item is set to "0", items of setting No.173 to 178 are not displayed on touch panel or dedicated loader, and cannot be referred or updated.In addition, if this item is set as "0", setting No.173 to 178 operate with the default value.

Update operation level at fault. The default value is "1100."0: heavy fault, 1: heavy fault, 2: medium fault, 3: light fault, 4: light fault

Digit 1,000 Motor overload

Overspeed

CB switching fault

Earth fault

Settable 1, 2, 3

Settable 1, 3

Settable 0, 4

Settable 0, 3

Setting digit Assigned fault Setting value

1100 to 3343 × No.172=1173 Default: 1100Fault level selection 1

Digit 100

Digit 10

Digit 1

CAUTION

No.169 to 178： Setting items on faults

Touch panel setting class display: "FAULT"

169 10.0 to 399.9

170 11.0 to 400.0

%

%

171 10.0 to 999.9 s

Motor overload continuous rating

Motor overload setting current

Motor overload detecting time period

Specify a continuous current corresponding value when motor continuous rating current is made 100%. If No.131: (Motor current ratio) = (motor rating current) / (inverter rating current) is specified correctly, 100% corresponds to motor rating current.

Adapt this value to the operating motor or equipment specification.If a setting beyond the motor or equipment specification is specified, the motor or equipment may be damaged.

Specify an allowable value for motor overload current.Specify this setting value so as to become No.170＞No.169.(Ex. Specify "150" for 150% 60s.)


Specify a time up to detect fault when No.170 overload current continues from "0". (Ex. Specify "60" for 150% 60s.)


CAUTION

CAUTION

CAUTION


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-42

1 to 800 Word ×DSM card mounted181

D-Line: 1 to 63, T-Link: 400 or 800DSM received data quantity

Set quantity of DSM received data.With 1 to 63, D line mode and with 400 or 800, Ｔ link mode are set ,respectively.① Ｄ line mode : (quantity of received data per 1 set) × (quantity of sets on the same line) is set.② Ｔ link mode : by setting of 400, change to receiving 4 WORD/sending 4 WORD.

by setting of 800, change to receiving 8 WORD/sending 8 WORD.


UnitSetting


0 to 127 Station ×180 Transmission slave address

Setting No.180 to 191： Setting Items concerned with Transfer

Touch panel setting class display ："TRANSMISSION"

Set slave address of DSM at the time of MICREX (D-LINE or T-LINK) mode or set slave address of PSB at the time of PROFIBUS mode.Setting range depends upon modes （switchover of modes is performed by setting No.181.） When Ｄ-LINE mode, 1 to 7 When Ｔ-LINK mode, 0 to 99 When PROFIBUS mode, 0 to 127 Set for neither repetition nor the omission of a set number to exist to one-7 or less in the same line when you transmit D-LINE.Set the first address of data when you transmit T-LINK.

1.0 to 99.9

0.1 to 200.0

0.1 to 400.0

0.1 to 60.0

s

Hz

%

s

No.172=1

No.172=1

No.172=1

No.172=1

175

176

177

178

Default: 1.0s

Default: 4.0Hz

Default: 105.0%

Default: 5.0s

Medium fault shutdown timer

Startup hang-up detection frequency

Startup hang-up detection current level

Startup hang-up detection time period

Specify timer up to abrupt speed reduction to stop after medium fault occurrence. The default value is 1s.

Startup hang-up is detected when such status continues for more than No.178 as inverter output frequency is lower than No.176 and output current detection value (converted to motor) is higher than No.177.

CAUTION


D-Line:1～7, T-Link:0～99,Profibis:0～127

Update operation level of faults. The default value is "1000".0: heavy fault, 1: heavy fault, 2: medium fault, 3: light fault, 4: light fault

1000 to 4000 × No.172=1174 Default: 1000Fault level selection 2

Transfer error

Spare

Spare

Spare

Settable 1, 2, 4

Settable 0

Settable 0

Settable 0

Setting digit Assigned fault Setting value

Digit 1,000

Digit 100

Digit 10

Digit 1

CAUTION

－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-43

12.6 to 999.9

1.0 to 999.9

0.1 to 200.0

%

ms

Hz

192

193

194

Active current regulator for speed search proportional band

Active current regulator for speed search integration time

Forward ／Reverse revolution discrimination frequency

Setting No.190 - 198： Speed search setting item

Touch panel setting class display ： "SEARCH"

Set proportional band of active current control system for speed search "P (%) = x 100％"

Set integration time of active current regulation system for speed search.

Set discrimination revel of motor revolution direction when speed search processing.

1

Proportional gain


UnitSetting


0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 1 ×

185

186

187

188




Action selection at transfer error

Set these items when selecting inverter internal bit returned to transfer line.Selection of sending data can be selected from DO output data (pages of 5-8 to 11)

Set an operation pattern when transfer error has occurred while operated by transfer mode.

・When transfer error has occurred, it performs the fault action selected by setting No.174. However,when Major fault 2 (setting No.174 = 1xxx) is selected, the fault recording is performed after stop.

・When major fault 2 (setting No.174 = 1xxx) is selected, the Major fault 2 is recordedwhen transfer error has occurred and instantly it is changed to "motor free run condition".When setting No.174 is set to other than Major fault 2 (1xxx),

it actuates alike as "setting No.188 = 0".

0.1 to 5500.0

0.1 to 5500.0

s

s

190

191

Transmission inching acceleration time

Transmission inching deceleration time

Accelerate by the transmission bit command <RATE> at the moving slightly acceleration time, and decelerate at the moving slightly deceleration time. Set time up to 0-Hz rated frequency at time.







0 to 99

0 to 99

0 to 99

182

183

184




Set these items when selecting inverter internal data returned to transfer line.Selection of sending data can be selected from AO output data (pages of 5-1 - 4)




－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-44

0 to 1 ×200 Setting selection for testingBy control power supply "switching off", it is cleared to “0”.

Setting No.200 - 217： Setting items for testing

Touch panel setting class display ： "FOR TEST"

For setting No.201-217 settable, set this setting in "1".If this setting is "0", items from setting No.201 to 217 are not indicated in Touch panel and dedicated loader and can not be referred or changed.Even if this setting is set in "1", setting value is cleared to "0" by switching OFF the control power supply .

CAUTION


UnitSetting


0 to 9999

0.0 to 100.0 %

196

197For forward revolution

Retry restriction for Speed search

Frequency initial setting value at speed search abnormal (+ side)

Set limitation value of retry number when speed search unsuccessful. If retry number of speed search is over this setting, speed search abnormality is detected. After that, it actuates according to the setting of No.195.

Set the initial value of acceleration/deceleration calculator output when speed search is abnormal.

0.0 to 100.0 %198For reverse revolution

Frequency initial setting value at speed search abnormal (- side)

Set an action mode when speed search abnormality has been detected because the number of speed searchtry exceeds the value in setting No.196.

If speed search is abnormal, it stops as Major fault 2.

Depending on discrimination result when speed search processing, a frequency of No.197 [forforward revolution] or No.198 [for reverse revolution] is set in acceleration / decelerationcalculator output and operation is continued. If the discrimination result of polarity is "0", a frequencyfor No.197 [for forward revolution] is set in acceleration / deceleration calculator output.

Depending on the polarity of the frequency command value, a frequency of No.197 [for forwardrevolution] or No.198 [for reverse revolution] is set in acceleration / deceleration calculator output andoperation is continued. When a frequency command value is "0", a frequency of No.197 [for forwardrevolution] is set in acceleration / deceleration calculator output.

For the polarity of frequency command value, frequency setting value of the reverse polarity(when frequency command is forward revolution, No.198 [for reverse revolution], when frequency

command is reverse revolution , No.197 [for forward revolution]) is set in acceleration / decelerationcalculator output and operation is continued.

When a frequency command value is "0", the frequency of No.197 [for forward revolution] is set inacceleration / deceleration calculator output.

0 to 3195 Action at speed search abnormal

－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-45

12.6 to 999.9

1.0 to 999.9

0.0 to 399.9

%

ms

%

No.200=1

No.200=1

No.200=1

206

207

208

R1 tuning reactive current regulator proportional band

R1 tuning reactive current regulator integration time

R1 tuning reactive current regulator limitation

At the time of R1 tuning,set proportional band of reactive current control system P (%) = × 100％.

At the time of R1 tuning,set integral time of reactive current control system.

At the time of R1 tuning,set output limitation value of reactive current regulator.

1

Proportional gain


UnitSetting


0 to 6

-400.0 to 400.0 %

No.200=1

No.200=1

203

204

Signal selection for testing

Data for testing

When setting No.203 is set by "0 to 6", setting for inputting simulative detection data .A signal code which input a simulative data in setting No.203 is set.

0:non, 1:iq detected, 2:id detected, 3:Line Vq, 4:line Vd, 5:line Vs, 6:Vdc (100%/2000V) Data values which input simulative data in setting No.204 is set.

CAUTION

00 to 11 No.200=1201 For automatic test 1-/-/PCB test/ voltage

Spare

Spare

For PCB testing

Voltage

Spare

Spare

For PCB testing

For voltage generation testing

00 to 11 No.200=1202 For automatic test 2 -/-/Operation clear/Fault clear

Spare

Spare

Operation clear

Fault clear

Spare

Spare

Clear Operation time

Clear Fault history

CAUTION

CAUTION

Digit 1,000

Digit 100

Digit 10

Digit 1

Digit 1,000

Digit 100

Digit 10

Digit 1

－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-46

0.0 to 100.0

0.0 to 30.0

0.0 to 999.9

%

s

%

No.200=1

No.200=1

No.200=1

215

216

217

Reactive current tuning starting condition

Reactive current tuning start delay timer

Reactive current tuning pass/fail distinction level

218 0.0 to 999.9Test expantion level 1







Set output level of voltage control system (AVR) for reactive current tuning start-up.

Set the time from establishment of reactive current tuning start-up condition to tuning start-up.

Set distinction level of success or failure in establishing tuning by deviation of frequency command value and detected value.

For future use (unused)


UnitSetting


12.6 to 999.9

1.0 to 999.9

0.0 to 399.9

%

ms

%

No.200=1

No.200=1

No.200=1

209

210

211

R1 tuning active current regulator proportional band

R1 tuning active current regulator integration time

R1 tuning active current regulator limitation

At the time of R1 tuning,set proportional band of active current regulator Ｐ (%) = ×100％.

At the time of R1 tuning,set integral time of active current control system.

At the time of R1 tuning,set output limitation value of active current regulator.

12.6 to 999.9 % No.200=1212Reactive current tuning regulator proportional band

Set proportional band of reactive current tuning regulator P (%) = ×100％.

1.0 to 999.9

0.0 to 399.9

ms

%

No.200=1

No.200=1

213

214

Reactive current tuning regulator integration time

Reactive current tuning regulator limitation

Set integral time of reactive current tuning regulator.

Set output limitation value of reactive current tuning regulator.

1

Proportional gain

1

Proportional gain

－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-47

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

225

226

227

228

229

231

230

232

AO data 1 （internal）




AO data 5 （external）




Controller AO CH1

Controller AO CH2

Controller AO CH3

Controller AO CH4

External AO CH1

External AO CH2

External AO CH3

External AO CH4

Setting No.225 - 232： AO setting items

Touch panel setting class display ： “AO”

0 to 1

-400.0 to 400.0

times

%

×

-400.0 to 400.0

times

%

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

233

235

236

237

234

AO expansion selection

AO data 1 gain （internal）

AO data 1 off-set （internal）



Default : 1.00

Default : 0.0%

Default : 1.00

Default : 0.0%

When analog data code (see pages of 5-1 to 4) is set in above No.225 - No.228 , corresponded analog data can be output from AO each channel of the controller (CN 14)Default output is ±400%/±10V, however, by setting No.233 - 241 , gain or offset is changeable.

When analog data code (see pages of 5-1 to 4) is set in above No.229 - No.232 , corresponded analog data can be output from AO each channel of the externally-mounted AO card (Optional).Default output is ±400%/±10V, however, by setting No.233, 242 - 249 , gain or offset is changeable.

Setting No.233 - 250： Expanded AO setting item

Touch panel setting class display ： “EXT.AO”

To make setting No.234 – 250 settable, "1" is set in this setting.If this setting is "0" , items of No.234 – 250 are not indicated in Touch panel or the dedicated loader and can no be referred or changed. It actuates with default values.

-400.0 to 400.0

-400.0 to 400.0

times

%

times

%

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

238

239

240

241

Default : 1.00

Default : 0.0%

Default : 1.00

Default : 0.0%





Change the gain or off-set of controller AO.Default output is ±400%/±10V, however, changing gain enables optional unit amount to output. If changing to ±100%/±10V is required, set the gain with 4.00 times. Moreover, setting off-set value with other than "0" makes the level of setting value output to AO as "0" .If setting No.233 is "0", it actuates with Default.When the absolute value output is specified, the output is possible by the assumption of the gain setting minus set. Example: When the absolute value of the gain "Four times" is output, -4.00 times are set.


UnitSetting


-99.99 to 99.99

-99.99 to 99.99

-99.99 to 99.99

-99.99 to 99.99

－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-48

-400.0 to 400.0

-400.0 to 400.0

-400.0 to 400.0

-400.0 to 400.0

times

times

times

%

times

%

times

%

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

No.233=1

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

Default : 1.00

Default : 0.0%

Default : 1.00

Default : 0.0%

Default : 1.00

Default : 0.0%

Default : 1.00

Default : 0.0%

ＡＯ data 5 gain （external）

ＡＯ data 5 off-set （external）







Change the gain or off-set of optional external AO.Default output of AO is ±400%/±10V, however, changing gain enables optional unit amount to output. Moreover, setting off-set value with other than "0" makes "0" level of setting value perform AO output.If setting No.233 is "0", it operates with Default.When the absolute value output is specified, the output is possible by the assumption of the gain setting minus set. Example: When the absolute value of the gain "Four times" is output, -4.00 times are set.

1 to 12 No.233=1250 Default :1ＡＯ cell temperature selection

Set the selected cell when selected cell cooling frame temperature is set into AO output. For 1:U1 cell, 2:U2 cell, 3:U3 cell, 6:V1 cell, 7:V2 cell, 8:V3 cell, 11:W1 cell, 12:W2 cell, 13:W3 cell, temperatures of the cooling frames is output to AO. The preset value 4, 5, 9, 10, 14, and 15 are reserves.If setting No.233 is "0", it operates with Default.

Setting No.252 - 281：DIO expansion setting item

Touch panel setting class display ： "EXT.DIO"

0 to 1 ×252 DIFANH function Normal open/close

Select Standard actuation (Open/Close) of DI FANH signal （TEMPA） of Relay unit.When setting is "0", terminals close by signal ON.When setting is "1" , terminals open by signal ON.

0.01 to 10.00 s253 DIFANHL detection timer

Set DI FANH signal (TEMPA) of Relay unit and detection ON-Delay timer of DI FANL signal (TEMPB).

0 to 1 ×254 DO FTH function selection

Select output of DO signal (FTH) of Relay unit as follows.When setting is "0", terminals close depending on occurring conditions of Major fault １ or Major fault ２When setting is "1", terminals close depending on occurring conditions of Major fault １.

0 to 1 ×255 DIO expansion setting

For making setting No.256 to 281 settable, "1" is set in this setting. When this setting is "0", items of setting No.256 to 281 are not displayed on Touch panel and dedicated loader and can no be changed. It operates with Default.


UnitSetting


-99.99 to 99.99

-99.99 to 99.99

-99.99 to 99.99

-99.99 to 99.99

－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-49

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

×

×

×

×

×

×

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

265

266

267

268

269

270

Default : 3(SS)

Default : 13(RSTX)

Default : 15(Completion of Charging )

Default : 21(Frequency arriving at lower limit)

Default : 22(Frequency arriving at upper limit)

Default : 12(TST)







Function of DO signal （Y1-Y6） of Relay unit is selected from the list of pages of 5-8 to 11. The digital output can be done from DO signal (Y1-Y6) of the relay unit by setting the DO function data code (5-8-11 page reference) to set digit x□□. When set digit □xx setting is "0", it closes (contacting) between terminals by signal on.. When pertinent digit □xx setting is "1", it opens (opening) between terminals by signal on.. When setting No.255 is "0", it operates with Default.

0 to 163

0 to 163

0 to 163

0 to 163

×

×

×

×

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

256

257

258

259

Default : 8 (POFF)

Default : 2(FWD)

Default : 3(REV)

Default : 4(FTA)





0 to 163

0 to 163

0 to 163

0 to 163

0 to 163

×

×

×

×

×

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

No.255=1

260

261

262

263

264

Default : 5(FTB)

Default : 7(ERST)

Default : 11(AISEL)

Default : 12(AIC)

Default : 15(JOG)






Function of DI signal （X1-X9） of Relay unit is selected from the list of pages of 5-5 to 7. The digital input can be done from DI signal (X1-X9) of the relay unit by setting the DI function data code (5-5-7 page reference) to set digit x□□. When set digit □xx setting is "0", it is considered that it is the close (contacting) between the input terminals and it inputs and it exists. When pertinent digit □xx setting is "1", it is considered that it is the opening between the input terminals and it inputs and it exists. When setting No.255 is "0", it operates with Default.Note) Do not do the same DI function allocation to the two or more input terminal so that there is fear of irregular operation.

0 to 3 ×271Mask selection at power failure of DIFANHL

Select the detection mask condition of DI FANH signal (TEMPA) and DI FANL signal (TEMPB) of the relay unit when the power failure is detected momentarily.

When "0" is set; There is no detection mask. When "1" is set; It is a mask a control power supply split-second power failure occurs as for the detection

of the DI FANH signal and the DI FANL signal. When "2" is set; It is a mask a system power supply split-second power failure occurs as for the detection

of the DI FANH signal and the DI FANL signal. When "3" is set; It is a mask the control source or a system power supply split-second power failure occurs

as for the detection of the DI FANH signal and the DI FANL signal.


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4-50

0.1 to 200.0

0.1 to 200.0

Hz

Hz

No.255=1

No.255=1

276

277

Attained frequency level lower limit

Attained frequency level upper limit

Frequencycommand

Attained frequency lower limit output[Selection Do No.21 output]

No.276-No.276 0

When frequency command absolute value is below this setting value, DO of attained frequency lower limit [Selection Do No.21] turns on.For using DO of attained frequency lower limit , either function selection setting (setting No.265 - 270) for Y1 to Y6 or function selection setting (setting No.323 - 330) of DIO expansion card Y11 to Y18 (optional) is required to be set with "21".

Frequencycommand

Attained frequency upper limit output[Selection Do No.22 output]

No.277-No.277 0

When frequency command absolute value is below this setting value, DO of attained frequency upper limit [Selection Do No.22] turns on.For using DO of attained frequency upper limit , either function selection setting (setting No.265 - 270) for Y1 to Y6 or function selection setting (setting No.323 - 330) of DIO expansion card Y11 to Y18 (optional) is required to be set with "22".

ON

OFF

ON ONOFF

0 to 9999 s No.255=1278Input circuit breaker answerback output off-Delay timer

Set Off-Delay time of input circuit breaker answerback output (off-Delay) [selection Do No.34]. For using DO of input circuit breaker answerback output , either function selection setting (setting No.265 - 270) for Y1 to Y6 or function selection setting (setting No.323 - 330) of DIO expansion card Y11 to Y18 (optional) is required to be set with "34".

0 to 1 × No.255=1279 ＤＩ operation command input switching

Set Input mode of ＤＩ operation command input.

By inputting condition of DI-RUN, operation command is active.

DI [RUN]

Operation command

Pulse input DI-RUN activates "Operation command”, and pulse input DI-STOP [33] activates "Stop command".

DI-RUN

DI-STOP[Selection Di No.33]

Operation command

Note ) The pulse width of DI-RUN and DI-STOP [Selection Di No.33] requires 20 ms or more.

20ms or more

20ms or more


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E4-51


0 to 3 No.255=1280 Power supply normal output selection

Set output selection of power supply normal output [Selection Do No.59].For using DO of power supply normal output, either function selection setting (setting No.265 - 270) for Y1 to Y6 or function selection setting (setting No.323 - 330) of DIO expansion card Y11 to Y18 (optional) is required to be set with "59".

Instantaneous power interruption operation continuing

No.281

Line or control instantaneouspower interruption

Power supply normal output[Selection Do No.59]

Frequency acceleration/deceleration calculator output

No.281

Line instantaneous interruption


No.281

Line or control instantaneous power interruption


1 to 1000 ms No.255=1281 Power supply normal outputOn Delay timer

Set On-Delay timer of power supply normal output [Selection Do No.59].For using DO of power supply normal output, either function selection setting (setting No.265 - 270) for Y1 to Y6 or function selection setting (setting No.323 - 330) of DIO expansion card Y11 to Y18 (optional) is required to be set with "59".


No.281

Line or control instantaneous power interruption


Frequency acceleration/deceleration calculator output

No.281

No.281

No.281


No.281


UnitSetting


In operation In no operation

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

0 to 3

0.00 to 99.99

0.1 to 200.0

0.1 to 5500.0

200 to 1860

0.60 to 99.99

0.00 to 99.99

0.1 to 10.0

s

Hz

s

V

s

s

s

×

No.284≧2

No.284≧2

No.284≧2

284

285

286

287

288

289

290

291

Action selection at instantaneous power interruption

Operation continuing timer for instantaneous power interruption

Lowest frequency operation at instantaneous power interruption

Deceleration time at instantaneous power interruption

OVL voltage level at instantaneous power interruption

Restart delay timer at instantaneous power interruption

Detection timer for power failure

Setting No.284 - 291： Instantaneous power interruption setting items

Touch panel setting class display ： "POWER FAILURE"

Select an action when instantaneous power interruption has been detected. When setting "0" : Major fault 1When setting "1" : Minor fault 2 [Pulse OFF]When setting "2" : Minor fault 2 [Operation continuing]When setting "3" : Minor fault 2 [Operation continuing 2, In Regeneration operation, Pulse off due to

occurrence of the main circuit undervoltage]If this setting is set with "0" and "1", items of setting No.285 to 287 are not displayed on Touch panel and dedicated loader and can not be referred and changed.

Set operation continuing time from the time that instantaneous power interruption of the control has occurred when no line voltage detection is set (setting No.293=0). Or set operation continuing time from the time that instantaneous power interruption of the line power control has occurred when line voltage detection is set (setting No.293=1). However, only when operation continuing at instantaneous power interruption was selected (setting No. 284≧2）, this timer actuates.

Operation continuing is selected when instantaneous power interruption has occurred (setting No.284≧2), and when frequency command is below this setting value during operation continuation at instantaneous power interruption, Pulse is set to be off.

Operation continuing is selected when instantaneous power interruption has occurred （setting No.284≧2）, and when instantaneous power interruption has occurred while operation continuing, operation frequency deceleration time is set.

When cell DC voltage is over this setting value during operationcontinuation at instantaneous power interruption, frequency command deceleration processing is halted and regeneration amount is inhibited.

Set restart delay time when instantaneous power interruption has recovered. After instantaneous power interruption is recovered, restart is performed after remained voltage in motor is below 5% and more than this setting time lapses .

When no line voltage detection is (setting No.293=0), set power failure detection time of the control power supply, and when line voltage detection is set (setting No.293=1), set power failure detection time of the line power supply. However, when Major fault 1 is selected at instantaneous power interruption has occurred (setting No.284=0) or this setting value is 99.99, power interruption fault detection by this setting is not performed.

Set risetime of the magnetic flux command at the time of restarting from instantaneous power interruption. However, if speed search mode is set when restarting from instantaneous power interruption (No.164=x0xx), magnetic flux command is activated with time constant of setting No.94.


4-52


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Motor rotation speed

Inverter outputfrequency command

Control instantaneouspower interruption

detection

In case that setting No.284 is "0" (Major fault at instantaneous power interruption)and setting No.293 is "0" (The line voltage not detected);

when instantaneous power interruption has been detected, Major fault (Fault code No.10 : instantaneouspower interruption) is recorded, and the motor is in condition of Free-run.

Major fault



Control instantaneous powerinterruption detection

orLine instantaneous power

interruption detection

In case that setting No.284 is "0" (Major fault at instantaneous power interruption),and setting No.293 is "1" (Line voltage detected);

when control or line instantaneous power interruption has been detected, Major fault (Fault code No.10 :instantaneous power interruption or No.11: line instantaneous power interruption) is recorded, and themotor is in condition of Free-run.

Major fault

Free-run stop

Free-run stop


4-53

－－ INR-HJ5235-E




detection

In case that setting No.284 is "1" (Pulse OFF)and setting No.293 is "0" (The line voltage not detected);

when control instantaneous power interruption has been detected, Pulse off is performed, and the motor is in condition of Free-run. After recovering the power supply, the system restarts with the frequencycommand when the instantaneous power interruption occurred.

Free-run


T1 T2 T3

When control instantaneous power interruption detection time has become following condition, Major fault is recorded (fault code No.13: Power faliure)

Control instantaneous power interruption detection time >

setting No.290 [Detection timer for power failure]

Do not do power failure fault detection when you set setting No.290=99.99 s.

Restart waiting time T2 after power recovery depends upon setting of setting No.164-3 [Instantaneous power interruption drawing restart selection].

Acceleration time T3 depends upon setting value in setting No.29 to 34 and 45 to 54.

4-54

－－ INR-HJ5235-E



Free-run


T1 T2 T3

When control instantaneous power interruption detection time has become following condition, Major fault is recorded (fault code No.13 : Power failure)


setting No.297 [Detection timer for control power failure]

Do not do control power failure fault detection when you set setting No.297=99.99 s.

When line instantaneous power interruption detection time has become following condition, Major fault is

recorded (fault code No.12 : Line power failure)

Line instantaneous power interruption detection time > setting No.290 [Detection timer for power failure]


When control instantaneous power interruption and line instantaneous power interruption has occurred

concurrently, the fault is recorded what has been established in advance for the above condition.

Restart waiting time T2 after power recovery depends upon setting of setting No.164-3 [Instantaneous power

interruption drawing restart selection].

Acceleration time T3 depends upon setting value of setting No.29 to 34 and 45 to 54.

In case that setting No.284 is "1" (Pulse OFF)and setting No.293 is "1" (The line voltage detectee);

when control or line instantaneous power interruption has been detected, Pulse off is performed, and the motor is in condition of Free-run. After recovering the power supply, restart with the frequency command when the instantaneous power interruption occurred..

Control instantaneous powerinterruption detection

orLine instantaneous power

interruption detection

4-55

－－ INR-HJ5235-E



Depending uponacceleration setting time

ｆ1


detection

T1： setting No.285T2： power recoveryconfirmation time 25ms

In case that setting No.284 is "2" (Operation continuing) or "3" (Operation continuing 2)And setting No.293 is "0" (The line voltage not detected);

when control instantaneous power interruption has been detected, Regeneration operation is performed, and the motor is in condition of Operation continuing. After recovering the power supply, the system re-accelerates up to the frequency when the instantaneous power interruption occurred.

Regeneration operation

When instantaneous power interruption occurred, deceleration time is determined based on deceleration time determined by setting No.287 and overvoltage fault inhibiting function (HLR stop occurs if DC voltage detection value ≧ rated voltage).

If the inverter output frequency during regeneration operation is in the following condition, Pulse off is

performed despite the setting value of No.285 and start again after power recovery (see next page).

Inverter output frequency ＜

setting No.286 [Lowest frequency operation at instantaneous power interruption]

If setting of No.284 = 3 (Operation continuing 2) is set, or the cell main circuit voltage during regeneration

operation is in the following condition, Pulse off is performed despite the setting value of No.285 and the

system starts again after power recovery (see next page).

Cell main circuit voltage ＜ main circuit undervoltage level

When control instantaneous power interruption detection time has become the following condition, it is

recorded as major fault (Fault code No.13 : Power interruption).


setting No.290 [Detection timer for power failure]


Restart waiting time T2 after power recovery depends upon setting value of No.164-3 [Instantaneous power interruption pull-in restart selection].


T1 T2

・Control instantaneous power interruption detection time ＜ setting No.285 [Operation continuing timer at instantaneous power interruption]

4-56


T3

－－ INR-HJ5235-E



Depending uponaccelerationsetting timeｆ1


detection


When instantaneous power interruption detection exceeds T1 time, Pulse off is performed and the system starts again after power recovery.

When instantaneous power interruption occurred, deceleration time is determined based on deceleration time determined by setting No.287 and overvoltage fault inhibiting function (HLR stop occurs if DC voltage detection value ≧ rated voltage).

If the inverter output frequency during regeneration operation has become the bellow condition, perform Pulse off despite the setting value by setting No.285 and start again after power recovery (see next page).

Inverter output frequency ＜setting No.286 [Lowest frequency operation at instantaneous power interruption]

If setting by No.284 = 3 (Operation continuing 2) is set, and the cell main circuit voltage during regeneration operation has become the below condition, perform Pulse off despite the setting value by setting by No.285 and start again after power recovery (see next page).


When control instantaneous power interruption detection time T2 has become the below condition, it is recorded as major fault (Fault code No.13 : Power interruption).

Control instantaneous power interruption detection time > setting No.290 [Detection timer for power failure]Do not do power failure fault detection when you set setting No.290=99.99 s.

Restart waiting time T3 after power recovery depends upon setting value of setting No.164-3 [Instantaneous power interruption drawing restart selection].

Acceleration time T4 depends upon setting by setting No.29 to 34 and 45 to 54.

T1

T2

・Control instantaneous power interruption detection time ≧

setting No.285 [Operation continuing timer at instantaneous power interruption]

T3 T4 T1：settingNo.285

Free-run

4-57


－－ INR-HJ5235-E



Depending uponacceleration setting time

ｆ1

Line instantaneouspower interruption

detection

T1： setting No.285T2： power recoveryconfirmation time 25ms


When instantaneous power interruption occurred, deceleration time is determined based on deceleration time determined by setting No.287 and overvoltage fault inhabiting function (HLR stop is performed if DC voltage detection value ≧ rated voltage).

If the inverter output frequency during regeneration operation is in the bellow condition, Pulse off is performed despite setting value of setting No.285 and the system starts again after power recovery (see next page).


If setting No.284 = 3 (Operation continuing 2) is set, and the cell main circuit voltage during regeneration operation has become the below condition, Pulse off is performed despite the setting values of setting No.285 and the system starts again after power recovery (see next page).


When line instantaneous power interruption detection time is in the following condition, it is recorded as major fault (Fault code No.12 : Line power failure).

Line instantaneous power interruption detection time > setting No.290 [Detection timer for power failure]Do not do power failure fault detection when you set setting No.290=99.99 s.

Restart waiting time T2 after power recovery depends upon setting of setting No.164-3 [Instantaneous power interruption drawing restart selection].


T1 T2

・Line instantaneous power interruption detection time ＜

setting No.285 [Operation continuing timer when Power interruption]

In case that setting No.284 is "2" (Operation continuing) or "3" (Operation continuing 2)and setting No.293 is "1" (The line voltage detected);

When line instantaneous power interruption is detected, regeneration operation is performed , and the motor is in condition of Operation continuing. When control power instantaneous interruption is detected,the normaloperation is continued. After recovering the power supply, the system re-accelerates up to the frequency when the instantaneous power interruption occurred.

4-58


T3

－－ INR-HJ5235-E



Depending uponaccelerationsetting timef1

Line instantaneouspower interruption

detection


When instantaneous power interruption detection exceeds TI time, Pulse off is performed and the system starts again after power recovery.

When instantaneous power interruption occurred, deceleration time is determined based on deceleration time determined by setting No.287 and overvoltage fault inhabiting function (HLR stop is performed if DC voltage detection value ≧ rated voltage).If the inverter output frequency during regeneration operation is in the following condition, Pulse off is performed despite the setting value of setting No.285 and the system starts again after power recovery (see next page).


If setting No.284 = 3 (Operation continuing 2) is set, and the cell main circuit voltage during regeneration operation is in the following condition, Pulse off is performed despite the setting value of setting No.285 and the system starts again after power recovery (see next page).


When line instantaneous power interruption detection time T2 is in the following condition, it is recorded as major fault (Fault code No.12 : Line power failure).

Line instantaneous power interruption detection time > setting No.290 [Detection timer for power failure]Do not do power failure fault detection when you set setting No.290=99.99 s.

Restart waiting time T3 after power recovery depends upon setting value of setting No.164-3 [Instantaneous power interruption drawing restart selection].

Acceleration time T4 depends upon setting by setting No.29 to 34 and 45 to 54.

When control and line instantaneous power interruption occurs concurrently, Pulse off is perform when either condition of terminating operation continuing with instantaneous power interruption for control or line is established.

T1

T2

・Line instantaneous power interruption detection time ≧

setting No.285 [Operation continuing timer when Power interruption]

T3 T4

T1：Setting No.285

Free-run

4-59


－－ INR-HJ5235-E




detection

Normal operationcontinuing

When control and line instantaneous power interruption occurs at the same time, switching to regeneration

operation is performed at the time that line instantaneous power interruption occurs.

If control instantaneous power interruption detection time is in the following condition, it is recorded as Major

(Fault code No.13: Power interruption failure)




T1

・Control instantaneous power interruption detection time ＜

setting No. 296 [Operation continuing timer at Control instantaneous power interruption]

T1： Setting No.296

4-60


－－ INR-HJ5235-E



Depending uponaccelerationsetting time


detection

Normal operation

When instantaneous power interruption detection exceeds T1 time, Pulse off is performed and the system starts again after power recovery.

When control instantaneous power interruption detection time is in the following condition, it is recorded as

major fault (Fault code No.13: Power failure).




Restart waiting time T3 after power recovery depends upon setting value of setting No.164-3 [Instantaneous

power interruption drawing restart selection].

Acceleration time T4 depends upon setting of setting No.29 to 34 and 45 to 54.

When control and line instantaneous power interruption occurs at the same time, switching to regeneration

operation is performed at the time that line instantaneous power interruption occurs.

Moreover, Pulse off is perform when either condition of terminating operation continuing with instantaneous power interruption for control or line is established.

T1

T2

・Control instantaneous power interruption detection time ≧

setting No. 296 [Operation continuing timer at Control power instantaneous interruption]

T3 T4

T1：setting No.296

Free-run

4-61


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

0 to 1

50.0 to 200.0

0.0 to 150.0

0.00 to 99.99

0.00 to 99.99

75.0 to 125.0

%

%

s

s

%

×

No.293=1

No.293=1

No.293=1

No.293=1

No.293=1

293

294

295

296

297

298

0: non, 1: detectedLine voltage detection switchover

Line voltage detection compensation gain

Line voltage instantaneous power interruption detection level

Operation continuing timer for control instantaneous power interruption

Detection timer for control power failure

Cell DC voltage limitation compensation

Setting No.293 - 298： Line voltage setting items

Touch panel setting class display ： "MAIN VOLT."

When detecting line voltage, set "1".When setting "0" in this setting, items of setting No.294 to 298 and 300 are not displayed on touch panel and dedicated loader and they can not be referred and changed.

When line voltage is same as setting No.19 [Output rated voltage], set actual value data as "No.475 = 100% +1%, -0% ".

Specify instantaneous power interruption detection level of line voltage.

Set operation continuing time from the time that control power supply instantaneous interruption occurred, if line voltage detection is set enable. However, only when operation continuing at instantaneous power interruption was selected (setting No. 284≧2）, this timer actuates.

Set control power interruption failure detection time from the time that control power supply instantaneous interruption occurred, if line voltage detection is set enable. However, when Major fault 1 is selected at instantaneous power interruption has occurred (setting No.284=0) or this setting value is 99.99, power interruption fault detection by this setting is not performed.

Set cell DC voltage which limits AVR braking side and compensation value of cell DC voltage which makes command value for PLL reactive voltage command regulator 2.

Transformer tap voltage

Input rated voltageCompensation value　＝

When input rated voltage 3300V is connected to the tap for 3150V,

3150V

3300VCompesnation value　＝ ≒ 104.8%


4-62


UnitSetting


0.0 to 150.0 % No.293=1299Line voltage instantaneous power interruption detection level 2

Specify instantaneous power interruption detection level 2 of line voltage.

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Setting No.300 - 317： Synchronous switchover setting items

Touch panel setting class display ： "SYNCRONOUS"

0 to 1

250 to 9999

1 to 9999

0.0 to 399.9

%

ms

%

×

0.01 to 60.00

0.50 to 99.99

Hz

s

No.293=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

300

301

302

303

304

305

Synchronous switchover between line and inverter selection

ＰＬＬ regulator proportional band

ＰＬＬ regulator integration time

ＰＬＬ regulator limitation

ＰＬＬ output scale

ＰＬＬ operation start-up delay timer

-65.0 to 65.0

0.1 to 60.0

5.0 to 999.9

%

s

%

No.300=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

306

307

308

ＰＬＬ reactive voltage command

ＰＬＬ reactive voltage command speed adjusting calculation time

ＰＬＬ reactive voltage compensation regulator proportional band

Set "1", when performing synchronous switching from inverter to line or from line to inverter.This setting is active when line voltage detection is set (setting No.293=1). When "0" is set in this setting, items of setting No.301 to 314 are not displayed on Touch panel and dedicated loader and can not be referred and changed.

Proportional band of ＰＬＬ control system Ｐ（％）＝　　　　　　　 ×100％　

Set integration time of ＰＬＬ control system.

Set output limitation of ＰＬＬ regulator.

Set output scale of ＰＬＬ regulator.

Set waiting time up to the start-up of synchronous switchover processing from the time that frequency command reaches synchronous frequency, when synchronous switchover is performed.

Set reactive voltage command value of ＰＬＬ regulator as "= sinθ".Where θ = (Phase angle of Line voltage) – (Phase angle of inverter output voltage)This is set if phase difference "θ" between line voltage and inverter output voltage is changed.

Set rate of change of ＰＬＬ reactive voltage (the time required for change width of 100%).

Set proportional band of ＰＬＬ reactive voltage compensation control system Ｐ（％）＝　 ×100％

0.0 to 50.0 % No.300=1309ＰＬＬ reactive voltage compensation regulator output limitation

Set output limitation value for ＰＬＬ reactive voltage compensation regulator 1.


4-63

1

Proportional gain

1

Proportional gain


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

5.0 to 999.9

0.0 to 50.0

13 to 9999

13 to 9999

13 to 9999

50.0 to 150.0

%

%

%

%

%

%

No.300=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

No.300=1

310

311

312

313

314

315

PLL reactive voltage compensation regulator 2 proportional band

PLL reactive voltage compensation regulator 2 output limitation

Synchronous active current regulator proportional band

Synchronous reactive current regulator proportional band

Synchronous motor axis compensation regulator proportional band

Synchronous magnetic flux compensation

0.0 to 100.0

0.0 to 100.0

%

%

No.300=1

No.300=1

316

317

Slip reduction rate at synchronous switching to line

Output reactor %X

Set output limitation value for PLL reactive voltage compensation regulator 2.

Set proportional band of active current control system during PLL operation P（％）＝　　　　　　　 ×100％

Setting range , if setting No.312 ≧ setting No.135, is active current regulator proportional band.

Set proportional band of motor axis compensation control during PLL operation P（％） = ×100％

Setting range, if setting No.314 ≧ setting No.140, is axis deviance compensation regulator proportional band.

Set proportional band of reactive current control system during PLL operation P（％）＝ ×100％

Setting range , if setting No.313 ≧ setting No.138, is reactive current regulator proportional band.

Set so as that the following condition: output reactor (loading side) voltage = line voltage of +2% to -0% is get, when synchronous switchover between line and inverter is performed.

Set rate of slip reduction for frequency setting when synchronous switching. Frequency command = commercial frequency detection value - Minimum frequency (setting No.6) × rate of slip reduction at synchronous switching (setting No. 316)

Set "%X" of output reactor for synchronization with commercial line .


4-64

1

Proportional gain

1

Proportional gain

1

Proportional gain

1

Proportional gain


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

0 to 163

0 to 163

0 to 163

0 to 163

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

0 to 199

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×

DIO card mounted

DIO card mounted

DIO card mounted

DIO card mounted

DIO card mounted

DIO card mounted

DIO card mounted

DIO card mounted

DIO card mounted

DIO card mounted

DIO card mounted

DIO card mounted

319

320

321

322

323

324

325

326

327

328

329

330

SW2=DIOA limitation

SW2=DIOA limitation

SW2=DIOA limitation

SW2=DIOA limitation

SW2=DIOA limitation

SW2=DIOA limitation

SW2=DIOA limitation

SW2=DIOA limitation

SW2=DIOA limitation

SW2=DIOA limitation

SW2=DIOA limitation

SW2=DIOA limitation

DＩ X11 function selection (DIO card)




DO Y11 function selection (DIO card)








Setting No.319 – 330 ： DIO card setting items

Touch panel setting class display： "DIO CARD"

Only when DIO card is connected to controller 8 bits bus, settings of No.319 to No.330 are displayed on Touch panel and Loader, and settable. In addition, SW2 on DIO card is used by inserting to DIO-A side.


4-65

Function of DO signal （Y11-Y18） of Relay unit is selected from the list of pages of 5-8 to 11. The digital output can be done from DO signal (Y11-Y18) of the relay unit by setting the DO function data code (5-8-11 page reference) to set digit x□□. When set digit □xx setting is "0", it closes (contacting) between terminals by signal on.. When pertinent digit □xx setting is "1", it opens (opening) between terminals by signal on..

Function of DI signal （X11-X14） of Relay unit is selected from the list of pages of 5-5 to 7. The digital input can be done from DI signal (X11-X14) of the relay unit by setting the DI function data code (5-5-7 page reference) to set digit x□□. When set digit □xx setting is "0", it is considered that it is the close (contacting) between the input terminals and it inputs and it exists. When pertinent digit □xx setting is "1", it is considered that it is the opening between the input terminals and it inputs and it exists. Note) Do not do the same DI function allocation to the two or more input terminal so that there is fear of irregular operation.


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

0.0 to 60.0

0 to 9999

0.0 to 120.0

0 to 4

0 to 1

-100.0 to 100.0

s

ms

%

%

×

×

No.332≧1

No.332≧1

No.332≧1

No.332≧1

No.332≧1

No.332≧1

336

337

338

339

340

341

PID FB filter time constant

PID output filter time constant

PID limitation

PID command selection

PID FB selection

Touch panel PID command

0.0 to 3600.0

0.00 to 10.00

s

s

No.332≧1

No.332≧1

334

335

PID integration time

PID differential time

Set integration time of PID regulator. When setting value is 0 or 3600s, integration item output is "0".

Set differential time of PID regulator. When setting value is 0, differential item output is "0".

Set filter time constant of feed back signal of PID.

Set filter time constant of output of PID.

Set limitation of output of PID.

Select feed back signal of PID. When setting is 0： Ai1 (4-to 20mA). When setting is 1： Ai2 (±10V)In addition, if the same signal is selected for PID command and feed back, PID output become "0".

Set signal for command value of PID. When setting is 0： Di frequency command. When setting is 1： Touch panel PID command (setting No.341). When setting is 2： Ai1(4-20mA) frequency command. When setting is 3： Ai2 (±10V) frequency command. When setting is 4： Transmission (setting No.160=xxx0 demanded).

When Touch panel PID command is selected for command value of PID （when setting No.339=1）, set PID command.


4-66

Setting No.332 – 341 ： PID setting items

Touch panel setting class display ： "PID"

0 to 2

10.0 to 999.9 %

×

No.332≧1

332

333

PID operation selection

PID proportional band

Set "1" or "2", when making PID command active.If "1" is set, PID output is specified as frequency command. If "2" is set. operation is performed by the frequency other than PID and PID output is used for frequency compensation.If "0" is set in this setting, items of setting No.332 to 340 are not displayed on Touch panel and dedicated loader and can no be referred and changed.

Proportional band of PID regulator Ｐ（％）＝ ×100％1

Proportional gain


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

＝command ーFB

a

-a

b

2b

PD regulator（setting No.334=0）

1.37*bTd

(No.335)

-b

b

-2b

PI regulator（setting No.335=0）

b

b

b

b

-b

P regulator（setting No.334=No.335=0,）

2b

Ti

PID regulator

b

b

b

2bTi

2b

b

b

b

b = 1/P * a

(No.334)


b = 1/P * a

b = 1/P * a

b = 1/P * a

Time

Time

Time

Time

Time

b

b

ON OFF

(No.334)

-b

4-67

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

0 to 1

0.1 to 200.0

0.1 to 200.0

100 to 9999

0 to 9999

0.1 to 200.0

0.0 to 100.0

Hz

Hz

V

ms

Hz

%

×

×

×

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

343

344

345

346

347

348

349

Changeover to setting No. 2






Motor 2 setting enable

Motor 2 rating frequency

Motor 2 base frequency

Motor 2 output rated voltage

Motor 2 magnetic flux setting filter time constant

Motor 2 magnetic flux boosting frequency

Motor 2 magnetic flux boosting amount

Setting No.343 - 366： Motor ２ setting items

Touch panel setting class display ： "MOTOR2"

Set "1", when Motor 2" setting is made to be avalable.Make <No.20:MOT2> of DI to be ON in order to use of Motor 2 changeover.For assigning DI, select function selection setting (setting No.256 to 264, 319 to 322) of X1-to X9, X11 to X14 separately.If "0" is set in this setting, only items of setting No.345 to 367 are not displayed on Touch panel and dedicated Loader and can not be referred and changed.

Set rating frequency of Motor 2. This value becomes 100% output frequency when Motor 2 changeover (<No.20:MOT2> of DI is ON).

Adapt to specifications of driving equipment or Motor.Driving equipment or motor may be damaged if specified as over the specifications.

If magnetic field weaking control of Motor 2 is required, specify magnetic field weaking starting frequency.If magnetic field weaking control of Motor 2 is not required, specify the same value as the rated frequency.This setting is avalable when changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed.

Adapt to specifications of Motor.Motor may be damaged if specified as over the specifications.

This is the item to set the rated voltage of Motor 2. This value becomes 100% output voltage when changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20:MOT2> of DI is ON).

Adapt to specifications of Motor.Motor may be damaged if specified as over the specifications.

Set the value corresponding to magnetic flux alteration of Motor 2. Control stability is kept by setting the value corresponding to more than secondary time constant of Motor.The setting value is more than the value which is found by formula "(L2+Lm）/r2".When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.

Set the frequency for intensifying motor output torque of Motor 2. Input a frequency up to base frequency. When output frequency is "0", the torque in the low speed area is intensified by adding attenuation amount which becomes "0" with this frequency from boosting quantity of setting No.350 to the basic magnetic flux command. When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20:MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.

This is setting item when magnetic flux command is intensified from basic Ｖ/Ｆ pattern of Motor 2.Magnetic flux in low speed is intensified by using together with magnetic flux boost frequency setting.This setting becomes active at changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20:MOT2>of DI is ON).


4-68

CAUTION

CAUTION

CAUTION


UnitSetting


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

0.1 to 999.9

2 to 9999

0.0 to 399.9

%

ms

%

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

355

356

357




Motor 2 AVR regulator proportional band

Motor 2 AVR regulator integration time

Motor 2 output current limitation

Set proportional band of voltage control system of Motor 2 P（％）＝　　　　　　 ×100％

Adjust to a optimal value during spot adjusting.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.

By comparing limitation value calculated using this setting and No.365 (reactive current command gain) with setting value of No.101 and 102, a narrower value is given priority. Set the value of a rate for motor rating. Active current limitation value ＝ √（No.354２－No.365２）When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.


Set integration time of voltage control system of Motor 2.Optimal adjustment is performed as well as proportional band during commissioning.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.


% No.343=1353Changeover to setting No. 26

Motor 2 magnetic flux setting filter initial value

Specify magnetic flux setting filter initial value of Motor 2. When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.

4-69

0.0 to 400.0

0 to 9999

%

ms

No.343=1

No.343=1

351

352



Motor 2 startup magnetic flux boosting amount

Motor 2 startup magnetic flux boosting time constant

This is setting item where magnetic flux command is intensified when operation start up with basic Ｖ/Ｆ pattern of Motor 2. This corresponds to forcing at startup.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.

This setting item is to intensify magnetic flux command at startup comparing the basic V/F pattern of Motor 2. This corresponds to forcing at startup. This is used together with No. 352.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.

0.0 to 100.0 % No.343=1350Changeover to setting No. 23

Motor 2 weaking magnetic flux boosting amount

This setting item is to intensify magnetic flux command in operation with weaking magnetic flux comparing the basic V/F pattern of Motor 2. When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.

CAUTION

1

Proportional gain


UnitSetting


354 0.0 to 399.9 % No.343=1Changeover to setting No. 107

Motor 2 output current limitation(drawing)

CAUTION

The start withdrawing(current limitation starting) or the restrat withdrawing(current limitation restarting) when instantaneous power interruption sets the output current limitation value of Motor 2.The narrower value is adopted for active current limitation by comparing this setting value, the calculated limitation value from No.364 (Motor 2 reactive current command gain), and above setting value of No.99, 100, or No.101, 102. Specify a value comparing for motor rating.Active current limitation calculation ＝ √（No.354２－No.364２）When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.



0.00 ～ 20.00

－－ INR-HJ5235-E


363 % No.343=1Changeover to setting No. 130Motor 2 on-delay compensation

4-70

10.0 to 200.0 %

%

No.343=1

No.343=1

361

362



Motor 2 motor current rate

Motor 2 primary resistance compensation gain

Specify a ratio of motor rating current to inverter rating current of Motor 2. Refer to the page otherwise specified as for inverter rating capacity and rating current (page 1-6 to 9).When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.


Specify a percent impedance of cable resistance between motor of Motor 2 and inverter output. Primary resistance can be calculated automatically via tuning operation.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active. The primary resistance can be automatically computed by tuning operation .For tuning method, see the tuning paragraph.

11.0 to 400.0

10.0 to 999.9

%

s

No.343=1

No.343=1

359

360



Motor 2 overload setting current

Motor 2 overload detection time period

Specify an allowable value for motor overload current of Motor 2.Specify this setting value so as to become No.359＞No.358.(Ex. Specify "150" for 150% 60s.)When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.


Specify a time up to detect fault when No.359 overload current continues from "0". (Ex. Specify "60" for 150% 60s.)When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.


CAUTION

CAUTION

CAUTION

Specify a saturated value for ON delay compensation of Motor 2.This compensates deficit voltage amount generated at the ON/OFF time of IGBT element.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active. This setting value can be calculated automatically via tuning operation.Refer to paragraph on tuning for tuning procedure.


UnitSetting


10.0 to 399.9 % No.343=1358Changeover to setting No. 169Motor 2 overload continuous rating

Specify a continuous current corresponding value when motor continuous rating current is made 100%. If No.361: (Motor current ratio) = (motor rating current) / (inverter rating current) is specified correctly, 100% corresponds to motor rating current.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.

Adapt to specifications of driving equipment or Motor.Driving equipment or motor may be damaged if specified as over the specifications.CAUTION


Motor 2 reactive current command gain

Specify a ratio of exciting current to motor rating current of Motor 2. When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.

0.00 ～ 20.00

0.00 ～ 20.00

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Setting No.369 to 379： Expansion setting items

Touch panel setting class display ： "EXT"


4-71


UnitSetting


0.1 to 200.0

0.1 to 400.0

0.1 to 60.0

Hz

%

s

No.343=1

No.343=1

No.343=1

367

368

369

Changeover to setting No. 176Changeover to setting No. 177Changeover to setting No. 178


0.0 to 100.0

0.10 to 99.99

%

Hz

No.343=1

No.343=1

365

366



Motor 2 Ｌσ compensation coefficient

Motor 2 lowest frequency

Specify percent impedance of the cable between motor of Motor 2 and inverter output.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.

Specify the value corresponding to motor rated slip frequency of Motor 2.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.

CAUTION

Motor 2 startup hang-up detection frequencyMotor 2 startup hang-up detection current levelMotor 2 startup hang-up detection time period

Startup hang-up of Motor 2 is detected when such status continues for more than No.369 as inverter output frequency is lower than No.367 and output current detection value (converted to motor) is higher than No.368.When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.

Motor 2 output reactor %X

Set "%X" of output reactor for synchronization with commercial line of Motor 2. When changeover to Motor 2 (<No.20: MOT2> of DI is ON) is performed, this setting becomes active.

Station address

Operation selection at transmission abnormal(Modbus)

1 to 247

0 to 1

MOD card mouted

MOD card mouted

Setting No.373 to 378：Setting Items concerned with Modbus Transfer

Touch panel setting class display ： "Modbus"

373

374 ×

×

Set slave address of transmission at the time of Modbus mode.

Set an operation pattern when transfer error has occurred while operated by Modbus transfer mode.

・When transfer error has occurred, it performs the fault action selected by setting No.174. However, when Major fault 2 (setting No.174 = 1xxx) is selected, the fault recording is performed after stop.

・When major fault 2 (setting No.174 = 1xxx) is selected, the Major fault 2 is recorded when transfer error has occurred and instantly it is changed to "motor free run condition".

When setting No.174 is set to other than Major fault 2 (1xxx), it actuates alike as "setting No.374 = 0".

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Responce interval

Transmission stop detection time

Parity bit selection

Transmission speed

0.00 to 1.00

0 to 60

0 to 3

0 to 4MOD card mouted

MOD card mouted

MOD card mouted

MOD card mouted


s

s

×

×

×

376

377

378

Set parity bit mode of RS-485 at the time of Modbus mode.0:None (Stop bit: 2bit), 1:Even parity (Stop bit: 1bit), 2:Odd parity (Stop bit: 1bit),3:None (Stop bit: 1bit)

The RS-485 communication determination detection time at the Modbus transmission mode is set. It is detected to have become it inaccessible because of the disconnection etc. , and the breakdown operation by abnormal transmission begins for the station in the system that accesses it without fail within a certain fixed time while RS-485 communication driving. The transmission abnormality breakdown operation level is a digit of set No.174-1000, and the breakdown level of heavy breakdown 2, inside breakdown, and light breakdown 2 can be selected. When 0s setting = is set, the communication determination detection is not done.

Time from the reception end to the return of the response is set to the demand of the host at the Modbus transmission mode. Timing can be matched even with the equipment with a slow processing by setting the response time of the interval.

RequetMaster

Inverter Responset1

t1 = Response interval + αα = Operation lag time of inverter

375 ×

Set Transmission speed at the time of Modbus mode.0:2400bps, 1:4800bps, 2:9600bps, 3:19200bps, 4:38400bps

No. Item Display range Unit Remarks

Touch panel setting class display ： "UNSET"

999 No-setting item of setting data 1 to 379 Only display

Only when there is non-setting item in setting data, setting class is displayed on touch panel. And, by pressing F/D key, the cursor jumps to the setting number. If there are multiple non-setting items, the lowest number is displayed.


UnitSetting


4-72

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Ｎo. Item Default unit amount (Note 1) Remarks

5-1 Analog outputs and transmission sending internal data codes

0 ０Ｖ -

1 Frequency setting value ±10V / ±400%

2 ±10V / ±400%

3 ±10V / ±400%

4 ±10V / ±400%

5 -

6 ±10V / ±400%

7 ±10V / ±400%

8 ±10V / ±400%

9 ±10V / ±400%

11 ±10V / ±400%

12 ±10V / ±400%

13 ±10V / ±400%

14 - For check

15 - For check

16 - For check0V → +10V → 0V → -10V (every 500 ms)

17 ±10V / ±400%

18 -

19 ±10V / ±400% 100%/ motor rated voltage

20 ±10V / ±400% 100%/ motor rated voltage

21 ±10V / ±400%

22 ±10V / ±400%

23 ±10V / ±400%

24 ±10V / ±400%

25 ±10V / ±400%

Frequency command HLR(acc/dec) input

Frequency command HLR(acc/dec) output

Frequency command filter output

Spare

Voltage command (after base processing)

Voltage command (after pattern processing)

Voltage command (after compensation)

Magnetic flux command before compensation

Magnetic flux command filter outputMagnetic flux command (AVR input)

Magnetic flux command (ACR)

+10V

-10V

0V/±10V oscillation

Voltage command

Spare

Output voltage estimation filter inputOutput voltage estimation filter output

AVR output

Active current Iq command

Reactive current Id command

Frequency command

Frequency command (ACR)

10 ±10V / ±400%Magnetic flux command (after boost addition)

26 ±10V / ±400%

27 ±10V / ±400%

28 ±10V / ±400%

29 ±10V / ±400%

Slip frequency

Current limitation (Forward side)

Current limitation (Reverse side)

AVR output limitation (Forwardside)

30 ±10V / ±400%AVR output limitation (Reverse side)

Unit amount is ±32000/±400% when selected as sending internal data.

Note 1) Default unit amount when AO gain is 1 time and offset is 0 %.

When setting following No. into setting No. 225 to 232, relevant data are output to the built-in AO or the external AO (optional). The same data in numerical can be referred from loader (optional) using number added 400 to No. of AO.

Chapter 5 Indication & Output Data

5-1

Analog data & transmission sending internal data codes (1/4)

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Ｎo. Remarks

Analog output & transmission sending internal data codes (2/4)

Item

31 After frequency command filter (ACR) ±10V / ±400%

32 -

33 ±10V / ±400%

34 ±10V / ±400%

35 ±10V / ±400%

36 ±10V / ±400%

37 ±10V / ±400%

38 ±10V / ±400% Overload at 0%

39 ±10V / ±400% Overload at 0%

41 ±10V / ±400%

42 ±10V / ±400%

43 -

44 ±10V / ±400% 100% / motor rated voltage

45 -

46 ±10V / ±400%

47 ±10V / ±400%

48 ±10V / ±400%

49 ±10V / ±400%

50 ±10V / ±400%

51 ±10V / ±400%

52 ±10V / ±400% 100%/Inverter rated capacity (Note 2)

53 ±10V / ±400% 100%/3000Vdc（P-M, M-N added value）(Note 3)

54 ±10V / ±400%

55

±10V / ±400%

Spare

Active current Iq detection

Reactive current Id detection

Output current detection (motor converted)

Current limitation regulator input

Current limitation regulator output

Motor overload allowance

Inverter overload allowance

R1 compensation amount (reactive current component)

AI input value

Spare

Output voltage estimation

Spare

Active voltage Vq command

Reactive voltage Vd command

Voltage command

λ compensation value

AVR input

Output current detection (inverter converted)

Inverter output power

U1 cell main circuit voltage detection


V1 cell main circuit voltage detection

40 ±10V / ±400%R1 compensation amount (active current component)

56

57

58

59 -Spare



5-2

Note 2) The value of the inverter ratings capacity is assumed to be 100%. (The unit is disregarded. )The example: When you show 50% inverter output electric power of Ao52 with 1250kVA inverter device 1250×50%=625kW ← When is calculated, the unit is disregarded.

Note 3) "0" is shown by the input breaker opening with a main circuit voltage of the cell charged.

100%/3000Vdc（P-M, M-N added value）(Note 3)


Default unit amount (Note 1)

±10V / ±400%Spare

±10V / ±400%U3 cell main circuit voltage detection

±10V / ±400%Spare


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Ｎo. Remarks


Item

61

62

±10V / ±400%

63

±10V / ±400%

64

±10V / ±400%

65

±10V / ±400%


Spare

W3 cell main circuit voltage detection

Spare

66

±10V / ±400% 100%/3000Vdc (per cell) (Note 2)Main phase circuit voltage detection (average value)



67

±10V / ±400% 100%/3000Vdc (per cell) (Note 2)

68

±10V / ±400% 100%/3000Vdc (per cell) (Note 2)

Main phase circuit voltage detection (Max. value)

Main phase circuit voltage detection (Min. value)

69 ±10V / ±400%

70 ±10V / ±400%

Analog frequency command

DI frequency command

71 ±10V / ±400%

72 ±10V / ±400%

PID output

R1 computed value

73 ±10V / ±400%

74 -

ON-delay compensation computed value

Spare

75 ±10V / ±400% 100%/ rated voltageLine voltage detection

76 ±10V / ±400% 100%/ No.2 setting value

77 ±10V / ±400%

Line frequency detection

Line active voltage detection

60

78 ±10V / ±400%Line reactive voltage detection

79 -

80 ±10V / ±400% 100%/100℃ range of -40℃ to 110℃

Spare

Main controller temperature detection

81 ±10V / ±400% 100%/100℃ range of +10℃ to +110℃(Note 3)

82 ±10V / ±400% 100%/100℃ cell selection by setting No.250 (Note 3)

Cell cooling fins temperature detection (Max. value)

Selected cell cooling fins temperature detection

83

84

85

86 -

87 -

Spare

Spare

88 -

89 -

Spare

Spare

5-3


Note 3) "0" is shown by the input breaker opening.


±10V / ±400%

±10V / ±400%



100%/3000Vdc（P-M, M-N added value）(Note 2)100%/3000Vdc（P-M, M-N added value）(Note 2)

±10V / ±400%V2 cell main circuit voltage detection


±10V / ±400%Spare

±10V / ±400%Spare



－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Ｎo. Remarks


item

91 -

92 -

93 -

94 -

95 -

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

96 ±10V / ±400%PID command



97 ±10V / ±400%

98 ±10V / ±400%

PID detection

PID input

99 -Spare

90 -Spare

5-4


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

No

5–2 DI (X terminal) function selection data codes

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

11

12

13

14

15

16

10

Item

Function unassigned

Emergency stop

Forward revolution command

Reverse revolution command

External Major fault

External Minor fault

External Middle fault

External fault reset

Pulse off

Spare

AI/DI frequency command change

Ai input change

Ai frequency command polarity change

Spare

Di inching operation change

Multistage frequency change 1

Spare

When setting No.256 to 264 or optional DIO (DIOA) card is mounted, a function is selected by setting an above code into setting No.319 to 322.

Remarks

See the list in pages of 5-7.

Abbreviated as

SYX

FWD

REV

FTA

FTB

FTC

ERST

POFF

AISEL

AICHG

AIREV

DIJOG

MNB1

17

18

19

21

22

23

24

25

26

20



Spare

Current limitation 2 change

Acceleration and deceleration rate 2 change

Current limitation 1 change

Transmission operation cancel

Touch panel operation cancel

PID control active

Motor 2 parameter change



MNB2

MNB3

LMT2

HLR2

LMT1

TROFF

TCOFF

PID

MOT2

27

28

29

30

31

Synchronous switchover command to line Synchronous switchover command from line

Inverter circuit breaker answer

Commercial power supply breaker answer

Commercial line switchover

SYA

SYB

INVA

CPSA

CPS

5-5

By setting following No. in setting No.256 to 264, relevant data are input in built-in DI. Or by setting following No. in setting No. 319 to 322, relevant data are input in DI on DIO card (optional.)

DI (X terminal) function selection data codes (1/2)

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

No

DI (X terminal) function selection data codes (2/2)

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

43

44

45

46

47

48

42

Item

Drawing in start command

Stop command

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

When setting No.256 to 264 or optional DIO (DIOA) card is mounted, a function is selected by setting an above code into setting No.319 to 322.

Remarks

Active only when setting No.279 = 1 .

Abbreviated as

DRAW

STOP

49

50

51

53

54

55

56

57

58

52

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

59

60

61

62

63

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

5-6

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Frequency setting

DI MNB2 MNB1

FWD 0 0

FWD 0 1

FWD 1 0

FWD 1 1

DI

REV

REV

REV

REV

DI inching frequency selection by multistage frequency changeover of 1, 2 and 3 (forward rotation)

MNB3

0

0

0

0

FWD 0 0

FWD 0 1

FWD 1 0

FWD 1 1

１

１

１

１

MNB2 MNB1

0 0

0 1

1 0

1 1

MNB3

0

0

0

0

0 0

0 1

1 0

1 1

１

１

１

１

REV

REV

REV

REV

DI inching frequency selection by multistage frequency changeover of 1, 2 and 3 (reverse rotation)

Selected frequency









Selected frequency









Input signal

Setting No.

9

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

Setting No.

10

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

Frequency settingInput signal

5-7

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

129

130

Bypass circuit breaker synchronous switchover ReadyInverter breaker synchronous switchover Ready

０

０

5–3 DO (Y terminal) function data codes

0 ０

1

Releasing brake

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

In pulse on

In SS & pulse on

In operation

Major fault 2

Middle fault

Minor fault 1

Minor fault

Transmission status

Reset command

Spare

Charging completion


Operation preparation completed

In searching

Searching completed

Frequency attained

Frequency lower limitation attained

Frequency upper limitation attained

In computing motor overload

In computing inverter overload

In computing overload

10 Minor fault 2

26

27

28

Spare


Synchronous fault

0

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

110

126

127

128

SS

PONX

FTH2

FTM

FTL1

FTL1 or FTL2

RSTX

ERD

COP

FTL2

When setting No.265 to 270 or optional DIO (DIOA) card is mounted, a function is selected by setting an above code into setting No.323 to 330. Moreover, when setting DO number added with ＋100 in AO output setting (No.225 to 232), ON (10V) or OFF (0 V) of the relevant data can be output to AO.

TST

29

30

10V / ON

10V / ON

5-8

By setting following No. into setting No.265 to 270, relevant data are output to built-in DO. Or by setting following No. into setting No.323 to 330, relevant data are output to DO on DIO card (optional).

DO (Y terminal) function data codes (1/4)

Ｎo. ItemUnit amount

when AO selected

No. when AO selected

Remarks

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

31

32

Synchronous reactive voltage command attainment output

Motor 2 operation

33 Circuit breaker answer back output

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

131

132

133

DI fault


34 Circuit breaker answer back output(off-delay)

35 In AVR

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

Spare

In OVL

In deceleration

Printed circuit board temperature alarm output

In emergency stop

In current limitation

In slip limitation

DC current braking

In acceleration & deceleration

Frequency command "zero"

Frequency command issued

In instantaneous power interruption operation continuity

Thyristor on

In changing carrier frequency

Synchronous slip limitation

In processing synchronous switchover to/from line

In PLL actuating

In instantaneous power interruption pulse off processing

Control instantaneous power interruption

Line instantaneous power interruption

Cell control power supply lowering

Power supply normal output

44 In AVR saturation

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

144

When setting No.265 to 270 or optional DIO (DIOA) card is mounted, a function is selected by setting an above code into setting No.323 to 330. Moreover, when setting DO number added with ＋100 into AO output setting (No.225 to 232), ON (10V) or OFF (0 V) of the relevant data can be output to AO.

60 Commercial mode 10V / ON160

5-9


when AO selected


Remarks

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

61 In transmission operation 10V / ON161

62

63

In touch panel operation

In DI/AI operation

64 In PID control

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

162

163

DI-RUN

Ｎo. Item


65 Spare

66 Transmission SY1

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

74

76

77

78

79

80

Transmission PON

MCRN(Input circuit breaker) On command

Spare

DI-FWD

DI-REV

Spare

Over current

Overload

Over heating of cooling fins and control PCB

Optical link fault

Fuse blown

Spare

75 Over voltage

Unit amount when AO selected

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON


164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

175

176

177

178

179

180

174

Remarks


81

82

83

84

86

87

88

89

90

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

85 Spare

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

181

182

183

185

186

187

188

189

190

184

5-10

－－ INR-HJ5235-E



91

92

93

94

96

97

98

99

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

95 Spare

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

10V / ON

191

192

193

195

196

197

198

199

194

5-11


when AO selected


Remarks

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

5-4 Internal digital data indication

Internal digital data(1/4)

380

Start-up condition

Electrical condition unready

Parameter items are not set

Optical link error

Instantaneous power interruption


Charging imperfect

Major fault 1

Major fault 2

Middle & Minor fault

Transmission abnormal

In DI error continuing

Pulse off command existent

etc.(Emergency stop input or Test mode)

External electrical condition unready

No inverter breaker answer

No breaker answer

No. Item

381

External input 1

External electrical condition

Spare

Circuit breaker answer

Operation command

External reset

Fan/temperature system Major fault

Fan/temperature system Minor fault

Ground fault detection input

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Abbrev.

ERD

UNSET

LNK

PWRL

MPWRL

Charge

FTH1

FTH2

FTML

TER

DIERR

POFF

etc.

RD

MC_INV

MCRN

RD

MCRN

RUN

ERST

FANH

FANL

OVG

No. Item Abbrev. Remarks

"1" ： unready

"1" ： no setting item existent

"1" ：abnormal"1" ： instantaneous power interruption"1" ：line instantaneous power interruption

"1" ： imperfect

"1" ： fault occurrence



"1" ： abnormal

"1" ： continuing

"1" ： command existent

"1" ： emergency stop

"1" ： non

"1" ： non

"1" ： no switching on

Remarks

The ON or OFF condition of DI and DO data can be confirmed with No. 380s on touch panel and loader.The touch panel indicates such way as ■：1 (ON) or □：0 (OFF.)

（Example ： ■ FTH ・・・・・FTH（Major fault） is ON）

BIT 0 MSB

BIT 1

BIT 2

BIT 3

BIT 4

BIT 5

BIT 6

BIT 7

BIT 8

BIT 9

BIT A

BIT B

BIT C

BIT D

BIT E

BIT F LSB

BIT 0 MSB

BIT 1

BIT 2

BIT 3

BIT 4

BIT 5

BIT 6

BIT 7

BIT 8

BIT 9

BIT A

BIT B

BIT C

BIT D

BIT E

BIT F LSB

The touch panel indicates such way as ■：1 (ON) or □：0 (OFF.)

5-12

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

382

External input 2

X1

X2

X3

X4

X5

X6

X7

X8

X9

Spare

Spare

X11

X12

X13

X14

No. Item

Spare

383

External output 1


Spare

Y1

Y2

Y3

Y4

Y5

Y6

Y11

Y12

Y14

Y15

Y16

Y17

Y18

Y13

Remarks

X1

X2

X3

X4

X5

X6

X7

X8

X9

X11

X12

X13

X14

Abbrev.

ERD

Y1

Y2

Y3

Y4

Y5

Y6

Y11

Y12

Y13

Y14

Y15

Y16

Y17

Y18

BIT 0 MSB

BIT 1

BIT 2

BIT 3

BIT 4

BIT 5

BIT 6

BIT 7

BIT 8

BIT 9

BIT A

BIT B

BIT C

BIT D

BIT E

BIT F LSB

BIT 0 MSB

BIT 1

BIT 2

BIT 3

BIT 4

BIT 5

BIT 6

BIT 7

BIT 8

BIT 9

BIT A

BIT B

BIT C

BIT D

BIT E

BIT F LSB


5-13


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

385

No. Item RemarksAbbrev.


5-14

Frequency command selected

Transmission operation mode selection

Loader and touch panel operation modes selection

Ai/Di operation mode selection

PID operation mode selection

Synchronous operation mode selection

Spare

AI frequency command selection 1



DI inching frequency operation selection

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

DI up and down operation selection

PLC

TEST

SINGL

PID

CPS

AI1

AI2

AI3

DI-N

DI-UP

BIT 0 MSB

BIT 1

BIT 2

BIT 3

BIT 4

BIT 5

BIT 6

BIT 7

BIT 8

BIT 9

BIT A

BIT B

BIT C

BIT D

BIT E

BIT F LSB

384

Startup condition item "etc ". Display

When the ACR CPU software is being written .."1"

Emergency stop input

PWM test mode input

Local CTR test mode input

ACR CPU malfunction

PDU CPU malfunction

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

SYX

PWM-T

SLV-T

ACR-W

PDU-W

BIT 0 MSB

BIT 1

BIT 2

BIT 3

BIT 4

BIT 5

BIT 6

BIT 7

BIT 8

BIT 9

BIT A

BIT B

BIT C

BIT D

BIT E

BIT F LSB

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

When the PDU CPU software is being written .."1"


－－ INR-HJ5235-E5-15

No. Item

387

Cell DI error

RemarksAbbrev.

U1 Cell DI error

U2 Cell ＤＩ error

V1 Cell ＤＩ error


W1 Cell ＤＩ error


U3 Cell ＤＩ error

Spare


Spare

Spare

Spare


U1 ER

U2 ER

V1 ER

V2 ER

W1 ER

W2 ER

U3 ER

U4 ER

V3 ER

V4 ER

W4 ER

W3 ER

BIT 0 MSB

BIT 1

BIT 2

BIT 3

BIT 4

BIT 5

BIT 6

BIT 7

BIT 8

BIT 9

BIT A

BIT B

BIT C

BIT D

BIT E

BIT F LSB


386

Detection of cell control power supply lowering

U1 cell control power supply lowering


V1 cell control power supply lowering


W1 cell control power supply lowering



Spare


Spare

Spare

Spare


U1 PF

U2 PF

V1 PF

V2 PF

W1 PF

W2 PF

U3 PF

U4 PF

V3 PF

V4 PF

W4 PF

W3 PF

BIT 0 MSB

BIT 1

BIT 2

BIT 3

BIT 4

BIT 5

BIT 6

BIT 7

BIT 8

BIT 9

BIT A

BIT B

BIT C

BIT D

BIT E

BIT F LSB

Spare V5 PF

Spare U5 PF

Spare W5 PF

Spare U5 ER

Spare V5 ER

Spare W5 ER


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

5–5 Actual-Value Notation Dada Indication

Ｎo. Item Loader unit amount Remarks

401 ±32000 / ±400%

402 ±32000 / ±400%

403 ±32000 / ±400%

404 ±32000 / ±400%

405

406 ±32000 / ±400%

407 ±32000 / ±400%

Actual data (1/4)

408 ±32000 / ±400%

409 ±32000 / ±400%

411 ±32000 / ±400%

412 ±32000 / ±400%

413 ±32000 / ±400%

414

415

416

417 ±32000 / ±400%

418

419 ±32000 / ±400% 100% / motor rated voltage


421 ±32000 / ±400%

422 ±32000 / ±400%

423 ±32000 / ±400%

424 ±32000 / ±400%

425 ±32000 / ±400%

410 ±32000 / ±400%

426 ±32000 / ±400%

427 ±32000 / ±400%

428 ±32000 / ±400%

429 ±32000 / ±400%

430 ±32000 / ±400%

Unit amount is indicated in [%] on the touch panel.Both unit amount [%] and data of ±32000 are indicated on the loader.

Inverter internal actual value data can be referred on the touch panel and loader (optional).The same data can be output to AO by subtracting 400 from No. in following table and setting it into data setting （No.225 to 232）of AO.

5-16

Frequency setting value

Frequency command HLR(acc/dec) input

Frequency command HLR(acc/dec) output

Frequency command filter output

Spare

Voltage command (after base processing)

Voltage command (after pattern processing)Voltage command (after compensation)Magnetic flux command before compensation

Magnetic flux command filter outputMagnetic flux command (AVR input)

Magnetic flux command (ACR)

Voltage command

Spare

Output voltage estimation filter inputOutput voltage estimation filter output

AVR output

Active current Ｉｑ command

Reactive current Ｉｄ command

Frequency command

Frequency command (ACR)

Magnetic flux command (after boost addition)

Slip frequency

Current limitation (Forward side)

Current limitation (Reverse side)

AVR output limitation (Forward side)AVR output limitation (Reverse side)

Spare

Spare

Spare

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Ｎo. Loader unit amount Remarks

Actual data (2/4)

Item

431 ±32000 / ±400%

432

433 ±32000 / ±400%

434 ±32000 / ±400%

435 ±32000 / ±400%

436 ±32000 / ±400%

437 ±32000 / ±400%

438 ±32000 / ±400% Overload at 0%

439 ±32000 / ±400% Overload at 0%

441 ±32000 / ±400%

442 ±32000 / ±400%

443


445

446 ±32000 / ±400%

447 ±32000 / ±400%

448 ±32000 / ±400%

449 ±32000 / ±400%

450 ±32000 / ±400%

451 ±32000 / ±400%

452 ±32000 / ±400% 100%/Inverter rated capacity (Note 1)

453 ±32000 / ±400%

454 ±32000 / ±400%

455 ±32000 / ±400%

440 ±32000 / ±400%

456 ±32000 / ±400%

457 ±32000 / ±400%

458 ±32000 / ±400%

459


5-17

After frequency command filter (ACR)

Spare

Active current Iq detection

Reactive current Id detection

Output current detection （motor converted）

Current limitation regulator input

Current limitation regulator output

Motor overload allowance

Inverter overload allowance

R1 compensation amount （reactive current component）

AI input value

Spare

Output voltage estimation

Spare

Active voltage Vq command

Reactive voltage Vd command

Voltage command

λ compensation value

AVR input

Output current detection （inverter converted）

Inverter output power




R1 compensation amount （active current component）

Spare

Note 1) The value of the inverter ratings capacity is assumed to be 100%. (The unit is disregarded. )The example: When you show 50% inverter output electric power of Ao52 with 1250kVA inverter device 1250×50%=625kW ← When is calculated, the unit is disregarded.


100%/3000Vdc（P-M, M-N added value）(Note 2)100%/3000Vdc（P-M, M-N added value）(Note 2)


Spare


Spare


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


Actual data (3/4)

Item

461

±32000 / ±400%

462

±32000 / ±400%

463

±32000 / ±400%

464

±32000 / ±400%

465

±32000 / ±400%466

±32000 / ±400%467

±32000 / ±400%

468

±32000 / ±400%


469

±32000 / ±400%

470

±32000 / ±400%

471

±32000 / ±400%

472

±32000 / ±400%

473

±32000 / ±400%

474

±32000 / ±400%

475

476

±32000 / ±400% 100% / rated voltage

477

±32000 / ±400% 100% / No.2 setting value

460

478

479

480

481

482

483

484

485

486

487

488

489

±32000 / ±400%

±32000 / ±400%

±32000 / ±400%

±32000 / ±400%

±32000 / ±400%

100%/100℃, range :-40℃ to 110℃

5-18


Spare


Spare

Main phase circuit voltage detection （average value）

Main phase circuit voltage detection （Max. value）

Main phase circuit voltage detection （Min. value）

Analog frequency command

DI frequency command

PID output

R1 computed value

ON-delay compensation computed value

Spare

Line voltage detection

Line frequency detection

Line active voltage detection

Line reactive voltage detection

Spare

Main controller temperature detection

Cell cooling fins temperature detection (Max. value)

Selected cell cooling fins temperature detection

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare


Note 2) "0" is shown by the input breaker opening.

100%/3000Vdc (per cell) (Note 1)



100%/100℃ range of +10℃ to +110℃(Note 2)100%/100℃ cell selection by setting No.250 (Note 2)






100%/3000Vdc（P-M, M-N added value）(Note 1)±32000 / ±400%

±32000 / ±400%

Spare

±32000 / ±400%Spare



－－ INR-HJ5235-E


Actual data (4/4)

Item

491

492

493

494

495

496

497

±32000 / ±400%

498

±32000 / ±400%

499

±32000 / ±400%

490


5-19

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

PID command

PID detection

PID input

Spare

Spare

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Chapter 6 Transmission Data

6-1

< Outline >MICREX and the inverter are connected with others by transmission with the option card corresponding to three kinds of transmission, and the change in a monitor of the state of the bit data the fault besides the operation of the drive stop and in the inverter and in the inverter etc. and various parameters becomes possible from the distance in bulk though the drive stop of the inverter is possible from a touch panel, a special loader, analogue + DI instruction, and the DI instruction.

Option card and transmission which becomes possible・D-LINE and T-LINK can transmit with DSM card.

D-LINE transmission corresponds to 14 word transmission by nine words. T-LINK transmission corresponds to 4+4 word transmission by 8+8 words.

・PROFIBUS can transmit with PSB card. It corresponds to DP V0 and DP V1 of PROFIBUS DP. PPO type 1-5 is supported in accordance with PROFIDRIVE Ver.3.

・Modbus can transmit（Half duplex transmission by RS-485） with MOD card. It corresponds to the Modbus RTU mode (ASCII mode uncorresponds).

Display the sending and receiving data of MICREX(PLC) by 600-799 of the touch panel and loaders (option). The value to No.723-739 shows the data to the MICREX→ inverter and maintain it to control power supply reset after receiving data. In the touch panel, the value can be referred to with M05 Transmission.

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

6-1 PROFIBUS transmission

6-1-1．Baud-rate (transmission speed)Baud-rate of profibus-DP-network is designated at the setting of master (PLC), and on same line, only one baud-rate can be used.In side of PSB (side of drive), it isn't necessary to setting baud rate, because there is automatic baud rate detection function at PSB-board (profibus transmission board).In this device, The baud rate from 9.6kBPS to 12MBPS is supported.

6-1-2．TerminatorEnd-node of profibus-DP network should insert terminator, for prevent reflection on the bus-line. This can be switched by using the terminator-switch of connector side.

The node in the terminal (PSB card of drive) is always recommended to turn on the power supply. if other node (drive or other device) use with turn off the control-source of drive of terminal, put in the active-terminater at the terminal.

6-1-3．Node-addressThe node-address is set by the setting-item (the control transmission slave-address) of drive-side.

6-1-4．PPO-type selectThe node-address is set by the setting-item (the control transmission slave-address) of drive-side.In this device, PPO from 1 to 5 is supported and data is allocated as follows.

PPO1

PPO2

PPO3

PPO4

PPO5

PKE

PKE

PKE PZD10

PZD6

PZD6

PKW PZD

IND -

IND -

IND -

PWE

PWE

PWE

PZD1 PZD2

PZD1 PZD2

PZD1 PZD2

PZD1 PZD2

PZD1 PZD2

PZD3 PZD4 PZD5

PZD3 PZD4 PZD5

PZD3 PZD4 PZD5 ・・・

6-1-5．notandumIf you connect the profidrive-matching device including this device in the MELSEC, the following notes are reported. In "Slave Modules" that sets the PPO type, three of reserved is inserted in "installed Module".Ex.: "installed Module" when PP5 is set

[000] reserved[001] reserved[002] reserved[003] PPO5 : 4 PKW 10 PZD

It is necessary to do byte-swap.

6-2

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

621

622

623

624

625

626

627

628

629

611

612

613

614

615

616

617

618

619

PZD receivebuffer

PZD receive allocation(IND number)

610

620

Profibus card(PSB card)

PZDData

PKWData

(PPO1,2,5)

parameter request

(Message communicatio

n byDP-V1)

ProfibusTransmission line

630

631

632

633

634

635

PKW receive(transformed by PSB)

Change with crach byPNU=915IND=1～10

600

601

STW1

STW2

604SPW

640 NSOLL_A (V*)

646

647

661

662

663

1

IND

3

5

127

112

113

131

132

133

T_AC (Tac)

T_DC (Tdc)

RCH_L

DEV_L

DEV_T

PLC_EN(STW1)

Writing byPNU=800IND=1～399

6-1-6．flow of receive-data (PLC→DDC)The flow of receive data is shown below. Value of 600s is the display numbers.

To transmission data

6-3

trans-form

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

6-1-7．flow of transmission-data(DDC→PLC)The flow of transmission data is shown below. Value of 600s is the display numbers.

681

682

683

684

685

686

687

688

689

PZD transmissionbuffer

PZD transmission allocation

(IND number)

680

Profibus card(PSB card)

PZDData

PKWData

(PPO1,2,5)

Parameter request

(Message communica

tion byDP-V1)

ProfibusTransmission

line

700

701

702

703

704

705

PKW receive(transformed by PSB)

Change with crach byPNU=916

IND=1～10

670

671

ZSW1

ZSW2

2

IND

4

691

692

693

694

695

696

697

698

699

690

157

158

301

FLT1

FLT2

399

・・・

from receive data

772

773

Analog-output data-code 1

Analog-output data-code 99

・・・

Reading byPNU=800

IND=1～399

Please refer to the explanation of 670, 671, 772, 773 for a detailed output of ZSW1, ZSW2, FLT1, FLT2.

6-4

trans-form

－－ INR-HJ5235-E6-5

Note)Interlock having

J

ACR

PLC_EN

JOG_-

JOG_+

ACKN

SET_EN

RFG_ST

RFG_EN

INV_EN

~OFF3

~OFF2

ON

SS active timer short circuit command

AVR active timer short-circuit command

The command from PLC is valid.

Operating command with the inching frequency 2 (when bit9=bitA=bitB=0)

Operating command with the inching frequency 1 (when bit9=bitA=bitB=0)

Reset of the failure at the booting edge

0: HLR input = 0 (stop at normal deceleration rate)

1: HLR input = velocity command value

0:HLR operation stop, 1:HLR active

0:HLR output =0, 1:HLR possible to output

0: pulse off, interruption of free-run,1: pulse on (when bit0=bit1=bit2=1 & RNMC: on)

0: RNMC off after stopping with rapid deceleration rate.1: RNMC is ON condition.

0: free-run stop with pulse off & RNMC: off.1: RNMC is ON condition.

0: RNMC off after stopping with normal deceleration rate.1: RNMC is ON condition.

Spare

It is necessary when driving from PROFIBUS by two procedures or more (Three following procedures are recommended).

1．"0406" is set in control word 1, and it is assumed the state of the switch on preparation(turn on RD_SW). 2．Set "0407" in control word 1, and turn on MCRN(turn on RD_OP). …… It is possible to omit it. 3．Set "047F" in control word 1, and drive according to the frequency command. (turn on OP_E)

Note) "0406" is set without fail because there is interlock (~OFF2,~OFF3) in MCRN turning on (ON), and it is necessary to put "ON" bit afterwards.

6-1-8 PROFIBUS transmissoin data

Refer since 6-15 pages excluding the PROFIBUS transmission.

6-1-8-1 Control word

600

PSB:STW1 (Control word 1)


601

PSB:STW2 (Control word 2)


Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

MSB

LSB

BIT F BIT 0

Notation1

Notation2

BIT E BIT 1

BIT D BIT 2

BIT C BIT 3

BIT B BIT 4

BIT A BIT 5

BIT 9 BIT 6

BIT 8 BIT 7

BIT 7 BIT 8

BIT 6 BIT 9

BIT 5 BIT A

BIT 4 BIT B

BIT 3 BIT C

BIT 2 BIT D

BIT 1 BIT E

BIT 0 BIT F

MSB

LSB

BIT F BIT 0

Notation1

Notation2

BIT E BIT 1

BIT D BIT 2

BIT C BIT 3

BIT B BIT 4

BIT A BIT 5

BIT 9 BIT 6

BIT 8 BIT 7

BIT 7 BIT 8

BIT 6 BIT 9

BIT 5 BIT A

BIT 4 BIT B

BIT 3 BIT C

BIT 2 BIT D

BIT 1 BIT E

BIT 0 BIT F

Notation 1 : The bit code displayed on MICREX-SX, MICREX-NX, MELSEC, etc. Notation 2 : The bit code displayed on DDC loader (FLOAD),MICREX-F,HDC,ICS,ACS, etc. 　　　　　（Please judge it by MSB and LSB, if either unclear.)

－－ INR-HJ5235-E6-6

604 PSB:Receiving Specification bit


605 PSB:Specification bit receiving flag

6-1-8-2 Specification bit

A specified bit with the above-mentioned becomes effective when data is received and specified bit is on.

604605

Spare

Acceleration rate

Deceleration rate

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Impossible to use.

Impossible to use.

△Nac

△Ndc

MSB

LSB

BIT F BIT 0

Notation1

Notation2

BIT E BIT 1

BIT D BIT 2

BIT C BIT 3

BIT B BIT 4

BIT A BIT 5

BIT 9 BIT 6

BIT 8 BIT 7

BIT 7 BIT 8

BIT 6 BIT 9

BIT 5 BIT A

BIT 4 BIT B

BIT 3 BIT C

BIT 2 BIT D

BIT 1 BIT E

BIT 0 BIT F


－－ INR-HJ5235-E6-7

610 PSB:Transmission reception buffer always 1


PZD_S1

619 PSB:Transmission reception buffer always 10 PZD_S10

The number of receive data is different because of receive data (PZD) updated every transmission refreshing cycle according to the PPO type (specification from PLC). PPO1,3・・・2wordPPO2,4・・・6wordPPO5・・・10word

620

No. Remarks

6-1-8-3 Receive data(PZD)

621

622

623

624

625

626

627

628

629

PSB:Receive data allocation 1

Item










Default

1

5

0

3

0

0

112

113

0

0

Abbr.

STW1

NSOLL_A

STW2

T_AC

T_DC

No.

The allocation of receive data (PZD) is displayed. The initial value by power supply reset : as shown in the table on. The allocation can change by PKE=915 and IND=1-10.









－－ INR-HJ5235-E6-8

630 PSB:Parameter reception buffer 1

No. Item RemarksContents

R. ID

Parameter receive data (PKW) is transmitted by the handshake with the following1．Transmission by PPO type 1, 2, and 5 in DP-V0/V1 always2．The parameter request by DP-V1.

It is shared in the format of the above-mentioned with the PSB card though the transmission format of both is different.

R.R. Request RefereNCs 01H～0FFHR.ID Request ID 01H(Read) , 02H(Write)Attr. Attribute 10HNo.El. No. of Elements 01HPKE ParameTER Number 0001H～0FFFFHIND SubiNDex 0000H～0FFFFHPWE1 Values H 0000H～0FFFFHPWE2 Values L 0000H～0FFFFH

6-1-8-4 Receive data(PKW)

R.R.

631 PSB:Parameter reception buffer 2 No.El.Attr.

632 PSB:Parameter reception buffer 3 PKE

633 PSB:Parameter reception buffer 4 IND

634 PSB:Parameter reception buffer 5 PWE1

635 PSB:Parameter reception buffer 6 PWE2

Reference: PKW transmission format by PPO type 1, 2, and 5

PKE Parameter

Abbr. Contents Remarks

AK+SPM+PNU

IND Sub index

PWE1 Data (Upper word)

PWE2 Data (Lower word)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

SPMAK PNU(Parameter number)

0 No-request

ID Function Res.

0

AK (Request)

Request for a parameter value

Change of the parameter value (Word)

Change of the parameter value (Long Word)

1,21

2

3

1

2

AK (Response)

0

ID

1

2

7

8

Response of the parameter value (Word)

Response of the parameter value (Long Word)

No-response

Refusal of the request (return a error number)

Function

No right to change the parameter by PKW interface

Receive data table (1/2)

AK: Request/ Response ID (0 to 15)

SPM: A toggle bit for self-active messages (not-used)

PNU: Parameter number (0 to 1999)

－－ INR-HJ5235-E6-9

No.

640

641

Item

PSB:Frequency command F＊

Range

-200.0 ～ 200.0

Unit

%

642

645

646

647

648

649

650

651

652

653

654

655

656

657

RemarksUnit amount

4000H/100%

Spare

661 PSB:Frequency attainment comparator level -400.0 ～ 400.0 %

662 PSB:Control deflection comparator level 0.0 ～ 400.0 %

1000/100%

1000/100%

663 PSB:Control deflection confirmation timer 0 ～ 9999 ms 1/1ms

Spare643

644 Spare

658

Spare659

Spare660

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Receive data table (2/2)

0 ～ 655.35

0 ～ 655.35 s

s 100/1s

100/1s

PSB : Acceleration rate (T_AC)

PSB : Deceleration rate (T_DC)

－－ INR-HJ5235-E6-10

PSB:ZSW1 (Status word 1)


INI

ERDX

SSX

REACH

CTL_R

NO_DEV

ALM

IH_SW

NO_OFF3

NO_OFF2

FLT

OP_E

RD_OP

RD_SW

670

6-1-8-5 Status word

Initial completion (set to “1” if receiving Sending command Word”)

Electrical condition come into effective.

Under operation

Frequency reaches the normal value.

PLC control is available.

A great control deviation is detected.

Alarm (light failure, moderate failure)

Prohibition of ON

OFF3 (ContorolWord answer)

OFF2 (ContorolWord answer)

Heavy failure (1, 2)

Under pulse-on

Completion of the preparation

Completion of the preparation for ON

PSB:ZSW2 (Status word 2)


NB3

NB2

NB1

HLRZ

ACC

SAT

671

Internal Bit3 (cf. The Inverter Instruction Manuals)



HLR output: zero

HLR under acceleration or deceleration

Under current limiting

Spare

Spare

Selection by setting No.185



MSB

LSB

BIT F BIT 0

Notation1

Notation2

BIT E BIT 1

BIT D BIT 2

BIT C BIT 3

BIT B BIT 4

BIT A BIT 5

BIT 9 BIT 6

BIT 8 BIT 7

BIT 7 BIT 8

BIT 6 BIT 9

BIT 5 BIT A

BIT 4 BIT B

BIT 3 BIT C

BIT 2 BIT D

BIT 1 BIT E

BIT 0 BIT F

MSB

LSB

BIT F BIT 0

Notation1

Notation2

BIT E BIT 1

BIT D BIT 2

BIT C BIT 3

BIT B BIT 4

BIT A BIT 5

BIT 9 BIT 6

BIT 8 BIT 7

BIT 7 BIT 8

BIT 6 BIT 9

BIT 5 BIT A

BIT 4 BIT B

BIT 3 BIT C

BIT 2 BIT D

BIT 1 BIT E

BIT 0 BIT F


－－ INR-HJ5235-E6-11

680 PSB:Transmission sending buffer always 1


PZD_A1

689 PSB:Transmission sending buffer always 10 PZD_A10

The number of transmission data is different because of transmission data (PZD) updated every transmission refreshing cycle according to the PPO type (specification from PLC). PPO1,3・・・2wordPPO2,4・・・6wordPPO5・・・10word

690

6-1-8-6 Sending data(PZD)

691

692

693

694

695

696

697

698

699

PSB:Sending data allocation 1










2

303

51

4

0

0

0

0

157

158

ZSW1

NIST_A

MIST

ZSW2

-

-

-

FLT1

FLT2

The allocation of transmission data (PZD) is displayed. The initial value by power supply reset : as shown in the table on. The allocation can change by PKE=916 and IND=1-10.









No. RemarksItemDefault

Abbr.No.

-

－－ INR-HJ5235-E6-12

700 PSB:Parameter sending buffer 1


R. ID

6-1-8-7 Sending data (PKW)

R.R.

701 PSB:Parameter sending buffer 2 No.El.Attr.

702 PSB:Parameter sending buffer 3 PKE

703 PSB:Parameter sending buffer 4 IND

704 PSB:Parameter sending buffer 5 PWE1

705 PSB:Parameter sending buffer 6 PWE2

710 PSB:Reception counter


6-1-8-8 RAS

Hexadecimal

711 PSB:Sending counter Hexadecimal

PSB:RAS Hexadecimal

713 PSB:Profile version Hexadecimal

777 Transmission mode0: There is no transmission, and 1: DSM, 2: Spare, 3: PSB and 4:Modbus

712

PSB CPU is operating.

DPC31 is abnormal.

Normal termination of cable check

Data is being exchanged.

RUN

S0

S1

S2

MSB

LSB

BIT F BIT 0

Notation1

Notation2

BIT E BIT 1

BIT D BIT 2

BIT C BIT 3

BIT B BIT 4

BIT A BIT 5

BIT 9 BIT 6

BIT 8 BIT 7

BIT 7 BIT 8

BIT 6 BIT 9

BIT 5 BIT A

BIT 4 BIT B

BIT 3 BIT C

BIT 2 BIT D

BIT 1 BIT E

BIT 0 BIT F


－－ INR-HJ5235-E6-13

PNU

800

Item

Transmission command(control data)

Remarks

Refer to the allocation of IND to the PSB control data list.

6-1-8-9 PNU list

IND

1～399

Access

R/W

915 Sending data allocationIND corresponds to sending buffer 1-10. Refer to PWE to the PSB control data list.

1～10 R/W

916 Receive data allocationIND corresponds to reception buffer 1-10. Refer to PWE to the PSB control data list.

1～10 R/W

918 Node address- R

947Cause of the 1-8th fault this time1～8

RThe last cause of the 1-8th fault9～16

963 Baud rate

4:500kBPS6:1500kBPS7:3000kBPS8:6000kBPS9:12000kBPS

- R

965 Profile versoin- R

967 Control word 1- R

968 Status word 1- R

－－ INR-HJ5235-E6-14

112

113

Acceleration rate

Deceleration rate

T_AC

T_DC R/W

R/W

127 Transmission specification word

128～130

131

Spare

Frequency attainment comparator level

SPW

RCH_L

Specified bit corresponding to No.111-126

Default=95%

R/W

R/W

132 Control deflection comparator level

133

134～150

Control deflection confirmation timer

Spare

DEV_L

DEV_T

Default=5%

Default=1s

R/W

R/W

151 Model code R

157

Spare

Fault word 1 FLT1 R

158 Fault word 2

159～255

Spare

FLT2 R

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

6-1-8-10 PSB control data list

No. Item RemarksSymbol

1 Control word 1 STW1

Number of words

1

Access

R/W

2 Status word 1 ZSW1 1 R

3 Control word 2 STW2 1 R/W

4 Status word 2 ZSW2 1 R

5 Frequency command NSOLL_A 1 R/W

6～50 Spare

51 Output current IAIST 1 R

52～111 Spare

114～126

Spare

152～156

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

6-2 DSM (D-LINE, T-LINK) Transmission Data and Modbus transmission

DSM transmission and Modbus transmission receiving data (1/3)

Ｎo. Item

DSM/MOD:Receiving Frequency setting F＊

Spare

Range

-130.0 to 130.0

Unit

%

Spare

Spare

DSM/MOD:Receiving Acceleration rate ΔＮac

DSM/MOD:Receiving Deceleration rate ΔＮdc

0 to 655.35

0 to 655.35 s

s

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

RemarksUnit amount

20000/100%

100/1s

100/1s

Spare

DSM/MOD:Internal data 1 select 0 to 99


DSM/MOD:Receiving Code 1

DSM/MOD:Receiving Data 1

DSM/MOD:Receiving Code 2

DSM/MOD:Receiving Data 2

Timesharing data split-second valueTimesharing data split-second valueTimesharing data split-second value

Timesharing data split-second value

Spare

Sending and receiving data from/to PLC(MICREX) are indicated on the touch panel and loader (optional) using No. of 720s.

6-15

720

721

722

723

724

725

726

727

728

729

730

731

732

733

734

735

736

737

738

739

740

741

742

743

744


The switch of use and the nonuse switches a pertinent bit of specified bit (750,751,754,755) on and off in the inverter of the transmission data to No.724-725. A set value of the inverter is used when a pertinent bit of a specified bit is off, and the transmission data is used for on. (There is not a part of inverter setting but there is the one only of the transmission data. )

※Note 1: In code 1(code 2) of No.740, the Nakaue title 16 bit eight bits show code 2 when it transmits the T-LINK8+8 word is transmitted, and eight subordinate position bits show code 1. In that case, No.742 always becomes 0.

code 2 code 1No.740

Upper 8bit Lower 8bit

6-2-1 Receiving data

－－ INR-HJ5235-E


748

DSM/MOD:Receiving bit 1

Synchronization 1

Spare

Spare

Spare

Forward rotation inching command

Reverse rotation inching command

Spare

Spare

AVR active timer short-circuit command

SS active timer short circuit command

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare


SY1

FJ

RJ

ACR

J

749

DSM/MOD:Receiving bit 2

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Pulse on command

Fault reset command

Host transmission error

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare


PON

RST

TER

6-16

MSB

LSB

BIT F BIT 0

Notation1

Notation2

BIT E BIT 1

BIT D BIT 2

BIT C BIT 3

BIT B BIT 4

BIT A BIT 5

BIT 9 BIT 6

BIT 8 BIT 7

BIT 7 BIT 8

BIT 6 BIT 9

BIT 5 BIT A

BIT 4 BIT B

BIT 3 BIT C

BIT 2 BIT D

BIT 1 BIT E

BIT 0 BIT F

MSB

LSB

BIT F BIT 0

Notation1

Notation2

BIT E BIT 1

BIT D BIT 2

BIT C BIT 3

BIT B BIT 4

BIT A BIT 5

BIT 9 BIT 6

BIT 8 BIT 7

BIT 7 BIT 8

BIT 6 BIT 9

BIT 5 BIT A

BIT 4 BIT B

BIT 3 BIT C

BIT 2 BIT D

BIT 1 BIT E

BIT 0 BIT F


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


750 DSM/MOD:Receiving Specification bit 1

Spare

Acceleration rate

Deceleration rate

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Impossible to use.

Impossible to use.


△Nac

△Ndc

751 DSM/MOD:Receiving Specification bit 2

750751754755

754 DSM/MOD:Specification bit 1 receiving flag

755 DSM/MOD:Specification bit 2 receiving flag

6-17

< specified bit 1 and 2>Code 1 = The value of data 1 at 90(d) becomes specified bit 1, and code 2 = The value of data 2 at 90(d) becomes specified bit 2.

< specified bit 1 and 2 reception flag >The bit which corresponds when the data which corresponds in the class of data 1 and code 1 is received stands from specified bit 1 reception flag. The bit which corresponds when the data which corresponds in the class of data 2 and code 2 is received stands from specified bit 2 reception flag. It maintains it to the transmission abnormality generation when standing once.

MSB

LSB

BIT F BIT 0

Notation1

Notation2

BIT E BIT 1

BIT D BIT 2

BIT C BIT 3

BIT B BIT 4

BIT A BIT 5

BIT 9 BIT 6

BIT 8 BIT 7

BIT 7 BIT 8

BIT 6 BIT 9

BIT 5 BIT A

BIT 4 BIT B

BIT 3 BIT C

BIT 2 BIT D

BIT 1 BIT E

BIT 0 BIT F


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

DSM transmission and Modbus transmission sending data (1/2)

DSM/MOD:Sending Frequency command Fsoll

DSM/MOD:Sending Current detection I1ist

-130.0 to 130.0

-400.0 to 400.0 %

%

Spare

Spare

Spare

Ｎo. Item Range Unit RemarksUnit amount

Acceleration/deceleration computing output

Motor rating conversion value

20000/100%

8000/100%

DSM/MOD:Send Internal data 1 -400.0 to 400.0 %

DSM/MOD:Send Internal data 2

DSM/MOD:Send Internal data 3

-400.0 to 400.0

-400.0 to 400.0 %

%




8000/100%

8000/100%

8000/100%

Spare

Spare

Spare

771

DSM/MOD:Sending bit 1

Initialization completion

MICREX cooperation enable


Thyristor pulse on

Spare

Under operation

Spare

Under acceleration

Under current limitation

HLR output zero

Major fault 1

Major fault 2

Minor fault 1

Internal bit 1

Internal bit 2

Internal bit 3





INI

COPX

ERDX

CHRG

SSX

ACC/DEC

SAT

HLRZ

FTH1

FTH2

FTL1

NB1

NB2

NB3

6-18

760

761

762

763

764

765

766

767

768

769

770

6-2-2 Sending data

MSB

LSB

BIT F BIT 0

Notation1

Notation2

BIT E BIT 1

BIT D BIT 2

BIT C BIT 3

BIT B BIT 4

BIT A BIT 5

BIT 9 BIT 6

BIT 8 BIT 7

BIT 7 BIT 8

BIT 6 BIT 9

BIT 5 BIT A

BIT 4 BIT B

BIT 3 BIT C

BIT 2 BIT D

BIT 1 BIT E

BIT 0 BIT F


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

IGBT short-circuit

772

DSM/MOD:Sending Fault 1



Ground fault

Inverter overload

Motor overload


Optical link abnormal

DC fuse blown

Main circuit overvoltage

Main circuit undervoltage

Main circuit voltage unbalanced

Spare

Motor overspeed

Overcurrent

Pick-up operation unsuccesful

Including cell control power supply lowering

Including local optical link


FTB

FTA

OVG

OLINV

OLM

PWRL

LINK

DCF

OV

UV

UNB

OS

OC

RTRY

773

DSM/MOD:Sending Fault 2

Pulse distribution abnormal

ACR CPU abnormal

PWM optical signal abnormal

Cell cooling frame overheating

Power interruption fault

Motor start-up fault

Analog frequency setting abnormal

Synchronization fault

Circuit breaker switchover fault


Line power interruption fault

Fan/temperature system Minor fault


External Middle fault

Spare

Transmission fault


PDU

A CPU

PWM

OTF

LPWRL

MLK

AI

SYNC

MCLAP

MPWRL

MLPWR

FANL

FANH

FTC

TFT

DSM transmission and Modbus transmission sending data (2/2)

When reset is not yet performed at the occurrence of a fault , the relevant bit remains to 1.

When reset is not yet performed at the occurrence of a fault , the relevant bit remains to 1.

6-19

IGBTS

MSB

LSB

BIT F BIT 0

Notation1

Notation2

BIT E BIT 1

BIT D BIT 2

BIT C BIT 3

BIT B BIT 4

BIT A BIT 5

BIT 9 BIT 6

BIT 8 BIT 7

BIT 7 BIT 8

BIT 6 BIT 9

BIT 5 BIT A

BIT 4 BIT B

BIT 3 BIT C

BIT 2 BIT D

BIT 1 BIT E

BIT 0 BIT F

MSB

LSB

BIT F BIT 0

Notation1

Notation2

BIT E BIT 1

BIT D BIT 2

BIT C BIT 3

BIT B BIT 4

BIT A BIT 5

BIT 9 BIT 6

BIT 8 BIT 7

BIT 7 BIT 8

BIT 6 BIT 9

BIT 5 BIT A

BIT 4 BIT B

BIT 3 BIT C

BIT 2 BIT D

BIT 1 BIT E

BIT 0 BIT F


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

6-2-3 Modbus sending and receivingThe Modbus transmission becomes a driving operation by T-LINK interchangeable transmission (6-2-1 receive

data and refer to data by 6-2-2 Sending data). The function code in the Modbus transmission to the T-LINK transmission is as follows. Function code No.1700-1707 is state acquisition of the inverter, and No.1708-1715 is an instruction in driving to

the inverter.

6-20

No Item Range Unit amount

1700 Receiving bit 1

Frequency command Fsoll

No.771(Refer to 6-15 page)

1701

1702

1703

1704

1705

1706

1707

Current detection I1ist

Internal data 1

Internal data 2

Internal data 3

Receiving Fault 1

Receiving Fault 2

-26000～26000

-32000～32000

-32000～32000

-32000～32000

-32000～32000



20000d/100%

8000d/100%

Inverter setting No.182



No Item Range Unit amount

1708 Frequency setting F＊

1709

1710

1711

1712

1713

1714

1715

-26000～26000 20000d/100%

Spare

Spare

Sending bit 1 No.748(Refer to 6-13 page)

Sending bit 2 No.749(Refer to 6-13 page)

Attention:The direction of data is writing the transmission and the reception of it the PLC side

in the subject.

Data 1

Code 2No.750～755

(Refer to 6-14 page)Data 2

Code 1

Read/Write

Read only

Read only

Read only

Read only

Read only

Read only

Read only

Read only

Read/Write

Read/Write

Read/Write

Read/Write

Read/Write

Read/Write

Read/Write

Read/Write

Read/Write

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

780

DSM:RAS

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Host transmission system normal

P(E) link healthy off

Spare

DLA abnormal

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare


781

DSM:Status

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

RUN

Reception error

Overrun or Underrun

Many CRC errors occurrence

Transmission cycle overtime

Transmission frame normal

DSM setting normal

DSM memory initialization completion


No. Item Remarks

782 DSM:receiving counter

DSM RAS (1/1)

6-21

6-3 Transmission RAS

777 Transmission mode

No. Item Remarks

Following No.780-782 is RAS information on the DSM card.

0: There is no transmission, 1: DSM, 2: Spare, 3: PSB and 4:Modbus

MSB

LSB

BIT F BIT 0

Notation1

Notation2

BIT E BIT 1

BIT D BIT 2

BIT C BIT 3

BIT B BIT 4

BIT A BIT 5

BIT 9 BIT 6

BIT 8 BIT 7

BIT 7 BIT 8

BIT 6 BIT 9

BIT 5 BIT A

BIT 4 BIT B

BIT 3 BIT C

BIT 2 BIT D

BIT 1 BIT E

BIT 0 BIT F

MSB

LSB

BIT F BIT 0

Notation1

Notation2

BIT E BIT 1

BIT D BIT 2

BIT C BIT 3

BIT B BIT 4

BIT A BIT 5

BIT 9 BIT 6

BIT 8 BIT 7

BIT 7 BIT 8

BIT 6 BIT 9

BIT 5 BIT A

BIT 4 BIT B

BIT 3 BIT C

BIT 2 BIT D

BIT 1 BIT E

BIT 0 BIT F


－－ INR-HJ5235-E6-22

Modbus RAS (1/1)

No. 項目備考

795 Modbus error status

796 Modbus receiving counter

POD RAS (1/1)

No. 項目備考

798 POD error status

799 POD receiving counter

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Ｎo. Item Indication range Unit Remarks

901 1st cause of fault code See list of fault code (Note 1)

1) Fault causes and control data (1/1)

7–1 Fault Cause Indication

902 2nd cause of fault code Same as above

903 3rd cause of fault code Same as above

904 4th cause of fault code Same as above

















When faults occurs, the maximum 20 faults data are recorded in chronological order into following No. 901 to 920. These items are kept until next fault will occur after reset of the fault.

Major fault 1

Middle fault

Minor fault 1

Minor fault 2

Grade

Triggers

Transmission system faults operates in different way because faults are registered after the Emergency stop (after SS off).Occurrence of faults → Immediate emergency stop

→ Major fault after stop (Immediate Pulse off is also selectable)Occurrence of faults → Emergency stop after moderate fault timer → Moderate fault after stop

Immediately pulse off,Major fault 1 Relay on

After timer, Emergency stop, Pulse off

After stop,Start-up condition vanished

Only indication

Actuation at occurrence

Fault registered, Only trace acquired

Registered

Registered

Registered

Registered

Fault reg.

Registered

Acquired

Non

Non

Non

Trace back data

Acquired

enter

enter

enter

Not enter

Into start upcondition

Not enter

After stop

At any time

At any time

At any time

Reset condition

No reset

2) Fault grades and actuations

Major fault 2 Immediately pulse off,Major fault 2 Relay on Registered Acquired enter After stop

Constitute such an external sequence that makes the input circuit breaker open when Major fault 1 occurs.

Chapter 7 FAULT DIAGNOSIS

7-1

Note 1) The data are kept until a new fault will occur after reset of the fault . Note 2) In case that pulse-off is specified (setting No. 284 = 1) or operation continuing is specified (setting

No.284 = 2 or 3) when instantaneous power interruption is detected, the fault cause codes are overwritten if the following cause occurs again after passing 2 minutes or more after either of the following fault cause occurs. Fault code No.10 "Instantaneous power interruption",Fault code No.11 "Line instantaneous power interruption" or Fault code No.*8 "□□ cell control power supply lowering."

Note: Marked “*” is filled with cell number such as 4 to 18.

CAUTION

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

1

2

Fault codes (1/8)

3

Fault codes indicated in No.901 to 920, have the meanings described in the following table .

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

Recognizing method S： Software recognotion, H： Hardware recognition, R： External relay contact input

●

●

●

●

○

●

●

○

●

○

○

●

●

○

●

○

○

○

○

Grade

●：Default fault level, ○： Fault level selectable by setting








H

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

H

S

S

H

H

S

S

R

R

R

R

R

R

H

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

OC

OLINV

OLM

OS

A CPU

PDU

AI

MLK

PWRL

MPWRL

MLPWR

LPWRL

MCLAP

SYNC

RTRY

FTB

FTA

FTC

OVG

FANH

FANL

OTDDC

Over-current

Inverter overload

Motor overload

Over-speed

Spare

ACR CPU error

Pulse distribution error

Analog frequency setting error




Line power fault

Power fault

Spare

Spare

Spare

Circuit breaker switching fault

Synchronous fault

Pick-up operation unsuccessful

Spare

Spare

External minor fault

External major fault

External middle fault

Ground fault

Fan/temperature system major fault

Fan/temperature system minor fault

PCB temperature abnormal

Constitute such an external sequence that makes the input circuit breaker open when Major fault 1 occurs.

7-2

7–2 Fault codes

CAUTION

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1

Minor fault 2 Remarks

Fault code

Major fault 1

Touch panel code Fault Name

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Fault codes (2/8)

Recognizing method S： Software recognition, H： Hardware recognition, R： External relay contact input

●: Default fault level, ○: Fault level selectable by setting

31

35

36

37

38

●

●

●

●

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

○

Grade





S

S

S

S

S

●

Grade

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

●

●

○ Selection by setting No.284

S

S

S

S

S

S

H

S

●

●

●

●

●

●

40 H ●

LINK

MICRX

IFC

DLA

DLINE

Spare

Optical link error

MICREX error

Upper transmission system error

DLA error

D-LINE (T-LINK) error

U1 cell Main circuit overvoltage

U1 cell In-deceleration main circuit overvoltage

U1 cell Main circuit undervoltage P-M

U1 cell Main circuit undervoltage M-N

U1 cell Main circuit voltage unbalance

U1 cell PWM optical link error

U1 cell Control power supply lowering

U1 cell Cooling unit overheating

U1 cell DC fuse blown

OV

OVDEC

UV PM

UV MN

UNB

PWM

PWRL

OTF

DCF

7-3

Constitute such an external sequence that makes the input circuit breaker open when Major fault 1 occurs.CAUTION

34 PROFI ● ○ ○ Selection of setting by No.174SPROFIBUS error

33 PSB ● ○ ○ Selection of setting by No.174SPSB error

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


32 Spare

H ●IGBTS U1 cell IGBT short-circuit

30

29 R ●TRTMP Transformer overheat Major fault

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Fault codes (3/8)



61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

●

●


S

S

S

S

S

S

H

S

●

●

●

●

●

●

60 H ●

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

70

OV

OVDEC

UV PM

UV MN

UNB

PWM

PWRL

OTF

DCF

Grade

7-4


51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

●

●


S

S

S

S

S

S

H

S

●

●

●

●

●

●

50 H ●










OV

OVDEC

UV PM

UV MN

UNB

PWM

PWRL

OTF

DCF

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


H ●IGBTS U2 cell IGBT short-circuit

H ●IGBTS










U3 cell IGBT short-circuit

Note : Fault No.70 to 89, 120 to 139, 170 to 189, 196, 197, 201, 202, 206, 207 is reserved.

Spare Spare

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Fault codes (4/8)



Grade

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

●

●


S

S

S

S

S

S

H

S

●

●

●

●

●

●

90 H ●

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

●

●


S

S

S

S

S

S

H

S

●

●

●

●

●

●

100 H ●


OV

OVDEC

UV PM

UV MN

UNB

PWM

PWRL

OTF

DCF

OV

OVDEC

UV PM

UV MN

UNB

PWM

PWRL

OTF

DCF

7-5


81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

80

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


H ●IGBTS

H ●IGBTS

V1 cell Main circuit overvoltage

V1 cell In-deceleration main circuit overvoltage

V1 cell Main circuit undervoltage P-M

V1 cell Main circuit undervoltage M-N

V1 cell Main circuit voltage unbalance

V1 cell PWM optical link error

V1 cell Control power supply lowering

V1 cell Cooling unit overheating

V1 cell DC fuse blown










V1 cell IGBT short-circuit

V2 cell IGBT short-circuit

Spare Spare

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Fault codes (5/8)



Grade

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

120

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

130










7-6


111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

●

●


S

S

S

S

S

S

H

S

●

●

●

●

●

●

110 H ●

OV

OVDEC

UV PM

UV MN

UNB

PWM

PWRL

OTF

DCF

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


H ●IGBTS V3 cell IGBT short-circuit


Spare Spare

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Fault codes (6/8) Grade

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

●

●


S

S

S

S

S

S

H

S

●

●

●

●

●

●

150 H ●



OV

OVDEC

UV PM

UV MN

UNB

PWM

PWRL

OTF

DCF

7-7


141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

●

●


S

S

S

S

S

S

H

S

●

●

●

●

●

●

140 H ●

OV

OVDEC

UV PM

UV MN

UNB

PWM

PWRL

OTF

DCF

W3 cell Main circuit overvoltage

W3 cell In-deceleration main circuit overvoltage

W3 cell Main circuit undervoltage P-M

W3 cell Main circuit undervoltage M-N

W3 cell Main circuit voltage unbalance

W3 cell PWM optical link error

W3 cell Control power supply lowering

W3 cell Cooling unit overheating

W3 cell DC fuse blown

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


H ●IGBTS

W3 cell IGBT short-circuit

H ●IGBTS





















161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

●

●


S

S

S

S

S

S

H

S

●

●

●

●

●

●

160 H ●

OV

OVDEC

UV PM

UV MN

UNB

PWM

PWRL

OTF

DCF

H ●IGBTS


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Fault codes (7/8) Grade

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

180



7-8


171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

170

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1



Spare Spare

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Fault codes (8/8)

The code in the following table is not fault. As trace back data is adopted, however, it is indicated by No.901 to 920 alike faults.

211 Loader remote trigger S

RemarksFault code

Fault name

When triggered from a long distance with Loader (PF6).EXTTG

Touch panel code

7-9

Grade



193 S ●LLINK U1 cell Local optical link error


195 S ●LLINK

V1 cell Local optical link error

196


197

W1 cell Local optical link error

198 S ●LLINK


199 S ●LLINK

U3 cell Local optical link error

200 S ●LLINK

201


202

203 S ●LLINK


204 S ●LLINK


Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


205 S ●LLINK

206

207


Spare Spare

Spare Spare

Spare Spare

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Fault codes （1/21)

1 ●HOC Over-current

［Contents］ It is output when the peak value of the output current has exceeded the over-current actuation level.

The instantaneous actuation occurs when at least 137% of current has flowed in terms of rms intensity

depending on the ripple factor (determined by motor constant) of the output current.

［Cause］①Output short circuited ②Current regulator abnormal ③Abrupt acceleration/deceleration mode operation

［Check and Remedy］

① If the current increases abruptly immediately before the trip point, an output short circuit is suspected.

Check whether the motor proper or cable is short circuited. If it occurs concurrently with "DC fuse blown" in

fault code No. *1, or "AC fuse blown" in fault code No. *2, IGBT is probably broken and the inverter unit may

have to be replaced. (Note: Marks"*"are filled with 4 to 18 corresponded to cells).

② If it occurs concurrently with fault code No.6 "ACR CPU error" or No.7 "Pulse distribution error," Over-current

due to abnormality of the CPU regulating current or abnormality of the CPU distributing pulse has occurred.

It is required to replace a control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2) or a control stack (RKJS1SXK-

□□□□□).

③ If it occurred concurrently with fault code No.*7 "CellＰＷＭ optical signal abnormal," it is a optical signal error

between the optical converting unit PCB in the control stack and the inverter.

(Note: Marks“*”are filled with 4 to 18 corresponded to cells.)

Check the connection condition of the optical cable between the optical converting unit PCB (CDJC1EOK-

□□□□□, see pages of 2-11 to 14) and the inverter corresponded to the fault code.

If the connection condition of the optical cable is normal, it is required to replace the optical converting unit

PCB (CDJC1EOK-□□□□□, see pages of 2-11 to 14) or the control stack (RKJS1SXK-□□□□□)

corresponded to the fault code.

④ Check whether setting values, by setting No.99 to 102, No.111 to 113 and No.135 to 141, of the inverter are

input with setting values in the examination report.

2 ●SOLINV Inverter overload

［Contents］ It is output when an overload of the output current has been detected (when more than the rated current of the inverter flowed continuously). The computation starts when the rated current has been exceeded. An inverter overload is assumed at such as ;

105% current for 60 seconds or 120% current for 60 seconds

［Check and remedy］

① Check whether output current of inverter during operation has been beyond 100%, in comparison to the actual value data No.451 "Output current detection (inverter conversion)". If it exceeds 100%, lower the load on the motor.(Study to adjust valve opening or reduce operation frequency.) If the load can not be reduced, it is required to use larger capacity of the inverter.

7-10

7–3 Fault code details (Explanation of fault codes)

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


4 ● ○ Sellection by setting No.173SOS Over-speed

With the digit in setting No.173 to 100, fault levels such as Major fault 2 and minorfault 1 can be selected (see page of 4-41.)

［Contents］ It is detected when the output frequency of the inverter has been beyond 120% of therated value.

［Causes］① The inverter output frequency has increased because the slip frequency was excessively compensated on account of an excessive load.

② The speed was excessive when a rotated motor was subjected to a drawing operation.


① Check the load and motor conditions.② Check whether setting values, in setting No.135 to 141,of the inverter are

recorded with setting values in the examination report.

6 S ●A CPU ACR CPU Error

［Contents］ It actuates when no interruption from CPU for ACR for a given length of time.

［Causes］ Hardwares such as CPU and clock are abnormal.

［Remedy］ The CPU for current control or the peripheral circuits is abnormal.It is required to replace the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2) or thecontrol stack (RKJS1SXY-□□□□□.)

3 ● ○ ○Sellection by setting No.173SOLM Motor overload

With digits in setting No.173-1000, Major fault 1, Major fault 2, Moderate fault, Minor fault 1 and Minor fault 2 can be selected (see page of 4-41.)

［Contents］ It is output when an overload of the output current has been detected,when a current greater than by setting No. 169[358] flowed longer than the time determined by settinng No. 170[359], No. 171[360].)


［Causes］① If the motor speed is normal, the motor capacity is poor.② If a trip has occurred while the motor speed hardly rises, GD2 of the load may be so large

that the excessive acceleration current of the motor exceeds the allowable load factor.

［Check and remedy］① Check whether setting values,by setting No.169 to 171,131 (Set No. 358-361 is a set number when

"Motor 2" is selected.)of the inverter are recorded with setting values in the examination report.② Check whether the setting of overload level is met with the motor protection level.

If it does not correspond to the check-up items in ① to ②, reduce the motor load.(Study to adjust the valve opening or reduce the operation frequency)If impossible to reduce the load, it is required to use the larger capacity of the motor.

7-11

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


8

9

○

●

○ Selection by setting No.89S

S

AI

MLK

Analog frequency setting error


When abnormal, processing patterns are selectable by setting No.89 (see page of 4-28.)

［Contents］If analog frequency setting decreased rapidly (more than the rate set by No.90 during 10 ms), a fault is output.This failure is not detected when momentary power interruption detection or period of 100ms after power returned.

［Causes］Disconnection of analog frequency setting wire, analog converter error.

［Check and remedy］① Check the operation condition whether the analog frequency setting input in the

inverter has been beyond the above setting values.② Check the analog frequency setting wiring ( connection condition of the insulated

converter and the Relay unit.)③ Check whether analog converter actuates normally. Moreover, it is required to restore

the output of the analog converter (output is not zero) within 100ms after momentarypower interruption.

If it does not actuate normally, it is required to replace the analog converter. If a fault occurs after the analog converter replaced, It is required to replace the

control stack (RKJS1SXK-2154□) or the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2.)

［Contents］When inverter output frequency is setting No. 176[367] or lower and output current detection value (Motor converted value) of setting No. 177[368] or more has continued for the time of setting No. 178[369] or longer, start delay is detected.


［Causes］① Cannot be started due to lack of motor capacity② Cannot be started because the motor is mechanically locked.③ Restart-up control in free-run does not actuate normally.

［Check and remedy］① Increase motor capacity.② Check whether the motor is mechanically locked.③ Check whether restart-up from free-run can be performed normally. We would like you to contact our company because we will suppose that it is required to

adjust the restart-up control again, when additional faults have occurred.

7 S ●PDU Pulse distribution error

［Contents］This fault code is output if the WDT (watch dog timer) operated due to abnormal CPU for the pulse distribution which controls the output pulse or abnormal peripheral circuits.

［Causes］ Abnormal CPU for pulse distribution or abnormal peripheral circuits.

［Check and remedy］① Abnormal CPU for pulse distribution or abnormal peripheral circuits.

It is required to replace the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2) or the control stack (RKJS1SXY-□□□□□.)

7-12

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

By setting No.284, such fault levels as Major fault 1 and minor fault 2 can be selected ( see page of 4-52 .)

［Contents］If DDC control power supply has suffered from momentary power interruption (below 85% of power supplyvoltage for at least 20 ms) while the motor is operating , the fault is indicated.

If the minor fault 2 or only momentary power interruption in selection of pulse off has occurred, no fault trip will occur.

After power recovery (provided that operation conditions/commands from MICREX and outside are valid), the operation will restart automatically.

When operation continuation (setting No.284 ≧ 2) is selected , and・ when no detection is selected by selection of the line voltage detection (setting No.293＝0), operation is

ddecelerated at the decelerating rate defined by setting No.287 and accelerate again to the frequency after power recovery, where momentary interruption occurred,

・ when detection is selected by selection of the line voltage detection (setting No.293＝1), normal operation is carried out during momentary interruption［Check and remedy］

① check whether momentary power interruption has occurred actually. If no occurrence of actual momentary power interruption,② check whether the control power supply voltage is within ± 10% of rated voltage.③ check whether the input tap of the control power supply transformer (AC 220 V or AC 200 V taps)

is selected correctly. ④ check whether CN11-5 or 6 of the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2) is correctly

connected to the control power supply transformer.If no correspondence to the check items in ① - ④, it is required to replace the control stack

(RKJS1SXK-□□□□□) or the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2.)


11 ○ Selection by setting No.284H ●MPWRL Line instantaneous power

interruption

10 ○ Selection by setting No.284H ●PWRL Instantaneous power

interruption

By setting No.284, such fault levels as Major fault 1 and minor fault 2 can be selected ( see page of 4-52 .)

［Contents］ If line power supply has suffered from momentary power interruption (that is below the setting value of No.295 and continuing for more than 4 ms) while the motor is operating, a fault is indicated.

However, when a Minor fault 2 or momentary power interruption occurs in case selecting Pulse OFF, a fault trip does not occur. The operation will restart automatically after power recovery, provided that the operation condition and command from MICREX or outside are valid. Operation is decelerated at the decelerating rate defined by setting No.287 during momentary power

interruption when operation continuation is selected. And after power recovery, peration is acceleratedagain to the frequency where momentary interruption occurred. This failure is not detected when line voltage detection (setting No.293＝0) is no selected.

［Check and remedy］① Check whether the momentary power interruption of the line power supply actually occurred

If no actual occurrence of the momentary power interruption,② Check whether the line voltage is within ± 10% of the rated voltage.③ Check whether terminals of the control stack (TB1-1,2,3) are connected with wires.④ Check connections between terminals of the control stack (TB1-1,2,3) and terminals of the control PCB

(CN11-1, 2 and 3.) ⑤ Check whether the actual value data No.475 [line voltage detection] is within the range of +2% to -１%

which is computed by the next formula.Line voltage

× 100% = Actual value data No.475 [line voltage detection].line rated voltage

If the actual value is out of allowance, adjust it using setting No.294, so that it meet the value computed by the above formula.

If it does not correspond to the check items in ① to ⑤, and the adjustment of ⑤ can not be carried out, it is required to replace the control stack (RKJS1SXK-□□□□□) or the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2.)

7-13

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


12

13

H

H

●

●

MLPWR

LPWRL

Line power fault

Power fault

［Contents］ If line power supply suffered from momentary power interruption (that is below the setting value of

No.295 ) and continues for more than the time defined by setting No.290) while the motor is operating, a

fault is detected. This fault is not detected when major fault by line power momentary interruption

(setting No.284＝0) is selected.

Also this failure is not detected when line voltage detection (setting No.293＝0) is no selected.


① check whether momentary line power interruption has occurred actually.

If no occurrence of actual momentary power interruption,

② check whether the line power supply voltage is within ± 10% of rated voltage.

③ Check whether terminals of the control stack (TB1-1,2,3) are connected with wires.

④ Check connections between terminals of the control stack (TB1-1,2,3) and terminals of the control PCB

(CN11-1,2 and 3.)

⑤ Check whether the actual value data No.475 [ line voltage detection] is within the range of +2% to -1%

which is computed by the next formula.Line voltage

× 100%　＝　Actual value data No.475 [line voltage detection].line rated voltage

If the actual value is out of allowance, adjust it, using setting No.294, so that it met the value computed by

the above formula.

If it does not correspond to the check items in ① to ⑤, and the adjustment of ⑤ can not be carried out, it is

required to replace the control stack (RKJS1SXK-□□□□□) or the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see

page of 2-2.)

［Contents］ If DDC control power supply suffered from momentary power interruption (85% or lower of power

supply voltage,) and momentary power interruption continues for more than the time defined by the

setting value of No.290 where no line voltage detection (setting No.284=0) and by the setting value

of No.297 where line voltage detection is set (setting No.293＝1), while the motor is operating, a

failure is detected.

However, this failure is not detected when line voltage detection (setting No. 284=0) is no selected.


① check whether the control power interruption has occurred actually.

If no occurrence of actual momentary power interruption,

② check whether the control power supply voltage is within ± 10% of rated voltage.

③ check whether the input tap of the control power supply transformer (AC 220 V or AC 200 V taps)

is selected correctly.

④ check whether CN11-5 or 6 of the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2) is correctly

connected to the control power supply transformer.

If it does not correspond to the check items in ① to ④, it is required to replace the control stack (RKJS1SXK-

□□□□□) or the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2.)

7-14

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


17

18

19 ●

●


H

S

S

●MCLAP

SYNC

RTRY

Circuit breaker switching fault

Synchronous fault

Pick-up opeartion unsuccessful

By the digit of setting No.173-10, such fault levels as Major fault 1 and Minor fault 2 can be selected (see page of 4-41).

［Contents］ If both inverter circuit breaker and bypass circuit breaker are connected for more than 1 second while operation of synchronous switchover from/to bypass is performed, a failure is detected.

［Check and remedy］① Check whether the answerback signal wirings of the inverter and bypass circuit breaker are connected

correctly to terminals as drawn in elementary wiring diagram. ② Check whether the setting values by setting No.256 to 264 and 271 to 273 correspond to the

descriptions in the elementary wiring diagram.③ Check whether while operation of synchronous switchover to bypass is performed, the inverter circuit

breaker is opened after the bypass circuit breaker is switched on, or when operation of synchronous switchover from bypass is performed, the bypass circuit breaker is opened after the inverter circuit breaker is switched on. Moreover, check whether relays in the sequence actuate correcly.

④ Check whether conditions are correctly so indicated that the corresponded bit is on（■）in No.382 for the inverter circuit breaker switched ON and the corresponded bit is on（■）in No.382 for the bypass circuit breaker switched ON.

If it does not correspond to the check items of ① to ④, it is required to replace the control stack (RKJS1SXK-□□□□□) or the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2.)

［Contents］For synchronous switchover operation, meeting with the phase of the commercial power can not be completed within 20 s after synchronization is commanded, a failure is detected.

［Check and remedy］① Check whether the actual value data No.475 [line voltage detection] is within the range of 2% to -1%

which is computed by the next formula.

× 100% = Actual value data No.475 [line voltage detection].

If the actual value is out of allowance, adjust it using setting No.294 so that it meet the value computed by

the above formula.If the synchronous delay fault has occurred when operation of synchronous switchover to/from bypass wascarried out after checking the items in ①. We will assume that adjustment of the regulator is incorrect, wewould like you to contact us after checking the setting No.301 to 305.

［Contents］ If the number of retrials is more than the value of setting No.196 when the inverterstarts, a fault is detected. However, only when setting No.195 is "0" a fault is detected.

［Causes］① current detector is abnormal.② adjustment value is abnormal.

［Check and remedy］① check whether all setting values are input corresponding to the same setting values in the test

report.② check whether the motor can be started from a motor stop condition.

If it can not be started, it is assumed that current detection is abnormal.Check whether connecting wirings of the current detector are connected correctly.

In case of no correspondence to ① and ②, it is supposed to be required to adjust the speedsearch function again. Please contact us.

7-15

Line voltage

line rated voltage

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


－－ INR-HJ5235-E


22

23

24

25

●

●


R

R

R

R

●

●

FTB

FTA

FTC

OVG



External moderate fault

Ground fault

［Contents］This is output when Minor fault is input from the external sequence (terminals described in the elementary wiring diagram).［Remedy］Eliminate the cause of the external minor fault.

［Contents］This is output when Major fault is input from the external sequence (terminals described in the elementary wiring diagram).［Remedy］Eliminate the cause of the external minor fault.

［Contents］This is output when Moderate fault is input from the external sequence (terminals described in the elementary wiring diagram).［Remedy］Eliminate the cause of the external minor fault.

By the digit of setting No.173-1, such fault levels as Major fault 1 and minor fault 1 can be selected

(see page of 4-41).

[Contents] The ground fault detection relay operated to detect a fault.

［Causes］

① Ground fault of inverter output cable

② Ground fault of motor

[Check and remedy］

① Ground the inverter after check of discharge, and check Earth fault of the cables and the

motors after disconnecting the output cables from terminals of the inverter

② If this fault has occurred during Pulse of the inverter, we will suppose that the earth

fault detector is error. Replace it with a spare part and check after restarting.

In case of no correspondence to ① and ②, it is supposed to be required to adjust the speed

search function again. Please contact us.

7-16

DANGER

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

［Contents］ A fault is detected when fan fault of the inverter panel and transformer overheat (Major fault).

［Check and remedy］　(1) Cooling fan fault of the inverter panel

① Check the actuation of the thermal device for the inverter cooling fan.② Check that the thermal device of inverter panel cooling fan is set corresponding to the

thermal setting value described in the sequence.In case of ① and ②, it is required to replace the cooling fan.When setting value of ② is different from the value described in the sequence, change thesetting of the thermal device and reset it's value, and then restart the cooling fan.

(2) Overheating of the inverter input transformer (Major fault); it is deemed the cooling fan fault as Major fault depending upon panel constitution. Therefore, because the overheating of the inverter input transformer may not be monitored, check the sequence. Moreover, a cooling fan heavy failure and

a transformer overheating heavy failure might be individually observed. ① Check whether the ambient temperature of the inverter panel is 40 degree C or less,

and if not, operate the air conditioner to adjust the temperature to 40 degree C or less.② Check input current of the input transformer of the inverter. If input current exceeds the

rated current, it is required to review the operating frequency or the input transformer capacity.

26

27 ●

R

R

●FANH

FANL


Fan/Temperature system Minor fault


［Contents］ A fault is detected when fan fault of the inverter panel and transformer overheat (Minor fault).

［Check and remedy］　(1) The cooling fan fault of the transformer panel

① Check the actuation of the thermal device for the transformer cooling fan.② Check that the thermal device of transformer panel cooling fan is set corresponding to the

thermal setting value described in the sequence.In case of ① and ②, it is required to replace the cooling fan.When setting value of ② is different to the value described in the sequence, change thesetting of the thermal device and reset it’s value, and then restart the cooling fan.

(2) Overheating of the inverter input transformer (Minor fault); it is deemed the cooling fan as Major faultdepending upon panel constitution. Therefore, because the overheating of theinverter input transformer may not BE monitored, check the sequence.

① check whether the ambient temperature of the inverter panel is 40 degree C or less, and ifnot, operate the air conditioner to adjust the temperature to 40 degree C or less.

② check input current of the input transformer of the inverter. If input current exceeds therated current, it is required to review the operating frequency or the input transformer capacity.

7-17

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


－－ INR-HJ5235-E7-18


Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


28 H ●OTDDC Printed Board Temperature abnormal

［Contents］ A fault is detected when the temperature of the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□) exceeds60 degree C.

［Check and remedy］(1) The ambient temperature of the controller rises.

① check whether the ambient temperature of the inverter panel is 40 degree C or less, andif not, operate the air conditioner to adjust the temperature to 40 degree C or less.

If it does not correspond to the check items ①, it is required to replace the controlstack (RKJS1SXK-□□□□□) or the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2).

［Contents］ A fault is detected when fan fault of the transformer overheat (Major fault).

［Check and remedy］　Overheating of the inverter input transformer (Major fault); A cooling fan heavy failure and a transformer overheating heavy failure might be individually observed according to the board composition. Only in this case, this failure does the breakdown detection. Therefore, check the sequence.① Check whether the ambient temperature of the inverter panel is 40 degree C or less,

and if not, operate the air conditioner to adjust the temperature to 40 degree C or less.② Check input current of the input transformer of the inverter. If input current exceeds the

rated current, it is required to review the operating frequency or the input transformer capacity.

29 R ●TRTMP Transformer overheat Major fault

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

31 S ●LINK Optical link error

［Contents］ This is detected when an optical link constituting a multiplex transmission is abnormal.

［Causes］

① The optical link suffered from poor contact or the light quantity decreased.② The main controller is abnormal.③ The local controller is abnormal.

［Check and Remedy］

① Make the inverter receive the power supply again, and check whether transmission is established again. When after making the inverter receive power again, transmission can not be established and optical link error has occurred again,

② Check whether the short circuit connector is surely mounted on CNT terminal of the inverter cell. Moreover, check whether the fuse for the control power supply equipped on the front surface of the

inverter cell is blown. ③ check whether the optical cables (RM1, TM1) on the front surface (see page of 2-15) of cell

internal local controller and the optical cable (CN26, CN27) of control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2) in the control stack are connected correctly.

When those are connected correctly, check whether the optical cables are breaking or bending on the way.④ In the condition of no momentary power interruption, when it is detected concurrently with a fault

No.*8 cell control power supply lowering (4 to 18 is entered in * corresponding to each cell,) it is supposed that the inverter cell internal power supply or the controller failed. Replace the inverter cell.

If it does not correspond to the check items ① to ④. It is required to replace the control stack (RKJS1SXK-□□□□□) or the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2.)


7-19

DANGER

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


32 MOD ● ○ ○ Selection of setting by No.174SMOD error

By the digit of setting No.174-1000, such fault levels as Major fault 2, Middle fault and Minor fault 2 canbe selected ( see page of 4-42 .)

［Contents］When a logical error (address error and parity error, etc.) occursor the transmission at the time of set No.377 becomes interrupted by Modbus, the breakdown operation is done.(it is detected only when operating concurrently with Modbus and MC-RN condition is ON.)

［Causes］① Interruption, reset and abnormality of power supply of PLC(occurrence in all inverters connected)

② RS-485 cables breaking, contact failure③ Contact failure of RS-485 connectors, end resistance failure④ MOD card abnormality⑤ Interruption of transmission due to much noise

［Remedy］Check Modbus receiving counter is progressing. Moreover, after recording a faulton front surface of PLC and the light-on and -off conditions of state indication LED,

① When PLC: reset or replace power supply of PLC .② Cable breaking and contact failure: check wiring or connecting conditions of RS-485.③ Contact failure of connectors: check connecting condition of RS-485 connector

or end resistance④ Replace MOD card.⑤ check wirings of the transmission cable or grounding.

－－ INR-HJ5235-E


7-20

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


34 PROFI


［Contents］When transmission is interrupted on PROFIBUS for 100ms or more, this fault actuates.(it is detected only when operating concurrently with MICREX and MC-RN condition is ON.)

［Causes］① Interruption, reset and abnormality of power supply of MICREX (PLC)(occurrence in all inverters connected)

② PROFIBUS cables breaking, contact failure③ Contact failure of PROFIBUS connectors, end resistance failure④ PSB card abnormality⑤ Interruption of transmission due to much noise

［Remedy］Check whether No. 710 transmission reception counter orNo. 711 transmission sending counter is progressing. Moreover, after recording a faulton front surface of PLC and the light-on and -off conditions of state indication LED,

① When MICREX (PLC): reset or replace power supply of PLC .② Cable breaking and contact failure: check wiring or connecting conditions of PROFIBUS.③ Contact failure of connectors: check connecting condition of PROFIBUS connector

or end resistance④ Replace PSB card.⑤ check wirings of the transmission cable or grounding.

● ○ ○ Selection of setting by No.174SPROFIBUS error

33 PSB

By the digit of setting No.174-1000, such fault levels as Major fault 2, Middle fault and Minor fault 2 canbe selected ( see page of 4-42).

［Contents］ This actuates when "PSB abnormality" is set in status flag of PSB (PROFIBUStransmission board). (it is detected only when operating concurrently with MICREX andMC-RN condition turn-ON).

［Causes］ Hardware failure of PSB board.

［Remedy］Replacement of PSB boardNo abnormality of the inverter

● ○ ○ Selection of setting by No.174SPSB error

－－ INR-HJ5235-E


7-21

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1



［Contents］ This actuates when "DLA abnormality" is set in status flag of DLA (D-LINEtransmission board). (it is detected only when operating concurrently with MICREX andMC-RN condition turn-ON).

DLA: this is the board inserted in ACS2000, ICS, etc. for D-LINE transmission (sending side).

［Causes］ Hardware failure of DLA board.

［Remedy］Replacement of DLA boardNo abnormality of the inverter

37 ● ○ ○ Selection of setting by No.174SDLA DLA error


［Contents］ This actuates when P(E) link healthy bit sent from MPU of IFC (Transmissiontransponder) to DLA of IFC is "0". (it is detected only when operating concurrentlywith MICREX and MC-RN condition is ON.)

［Causes］ P (E) link Error: when MICREX is disconnected on Ｐ(E) and major fault occurred.

［Remedy］ Recovery of P(E) link.No abnormality of the inverter.


［Contents］ This actuates when "TER：transmission abnormal" bit is 1 in received data fromMICREX (PLC). （it is detected only when operating concurrently with MICREX and MC-RNcondition is ON）

［Remedy］ Check the reason why "TER bit" is activated in MICREX (PLC) side.No abnormality of the inverter.

35 ● ○ ○ Selection of setting by No.174MICRX MICREX error

36 ● ○ ○ Selection of setting by No.174SIFC Upper transmission

system error

－－ INR-HJ5235-E


Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1



［Contents］When transmission is interrupted on D-LINE and T-LINK for 100ms or more, this fault actuates.　　　　（it is detected only when operating concurrently with MICREX and MC-RN condition is ON.）

［Causes］① Interruption, reset and abnormality of power supply of MICREX (PLC) (occurrence in allinverters connected)

② D-LINE(T-LINK) cables breaking, contact failure③ Contact failure of D-LINE connectors, end resistance failure④ DSM card abnormality⑤ Change of definitions of D-LINE or T-LINK in MICREX (PLC)⑥ Interruption of transmission due to much noise

［Remedy］ Check whether a indication value (which is normal at 80) in No. 780 in controller , andindication value in No.781 (D-LINE is normal at 87, T-LINK at 83), and check whetherNo. 782 transmission reception counter is progressing. Moreover, after recording a faulton front surface of PLC and the light-on and -off conditions of state indication LED,

① When MICREX (PLC): reset or replace power supply of PLC .② Cable breaking and contact failure: check wiring or connecting conditions of D-LINE or T-LINK.③ Contact failure of connectors: check connecting condition of D-LINE or T-LINK connector

or end resistanceEnd resistance： connect to both ends (connectors) of the transmission cable (100 Ω)

④ Replace DSM card.⑤ If impossible to reset the fault , review definitions of D-LINE and T-LINK and the inverter

setting.⑥ check wirings of the transmission cable or grounding.

38 ● ○ ○ Selection of setting by No.174SDLINE D-LINE(T-LINK) error

7-22

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Fault codes (14/21)

The following fault codes concern details of faults which occurred in the inverter cell. Codes 40 to 207 below have the same fault contents in each cell.

Fault code Inverter cell where fault occurred

40 to 49

50 to 59

60 to 69

70 to 79

80 to 89

90 to 99

Inverter U1 cell

Inverter U2 cell

Inverter V1 cell

Inverter V2 cell

Inverter W1 cell

Inverter W2 cell

100 to 109

110 to 119

120 to 129

130 to 139

140 to 149

150 to 159

Inverter U3 cell

Spare

Inverter V3 cell

Inverter W3 cell

7-23

160 to 169

170 to 179

Inverter U1, U2, U3 cells Local optical link fault

Spare

DANGER

180 to 189

193 to 195

Inverter V1, V2, V3 cells Local optical link fault

Spare

Inverter W1, W2, W3 cells Local optical link fault

Spare

196 to 197

198 to 200

201 to 202

203 to 205

206 to 207

Spare

Spare

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Fault codes (15/21)

［Contents］ This is output when the DC main circuit fuse of the inverter inside cells has blown out.Check the actuation indication inside the unit for each discrimination.

［Cause］ When the fuse inside the inverter, short circuit of the inverter output or IGBT short circuitdue to abnormality of the controller or the gate drive unit.

［Remedy］

In most of cases, IGBTs are broken out (even such fuses which actuate in high speed can notcooperate with the IGBT to protect fully. Such fuses are mounted to prevent the expansion of damages.Accordingly, it is recommendable to replace the relevant inverter or contact us.

*0 H ●DCF Cell DC fuse blow

7-24

DANGER

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


［Contents］ Output it when IGBT of the inverter in the cell is short-circuited.Check the actuation indication inside the unit for each discrimination.The function of IGBT short-circuited detection is an option.

［Cause］ Short-circuit of inverter output, short-circuit by semiconductor element damage of IGBT etc. , and IGBT short-circuit due to abnormality of controller and gate drive unit.

［Remedy］

There is a possibility that the IGBT element has been damaged.(When the IGBT element short-circuit is detected, the software of the IGBT element is intercepted to prevent damage from expanding.)Accordingly, it is recommendable to replace the relevant inverter or contact us.

*1 H ●IGBTS Cell IGBT short-circuit

DANGER

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

*2 ●SOV Cell main circuit overvoltage

Fault codes (16/21)

［Contents］ This is output when DC main circuit voltage of each inverter cell become excessive (DC1050V or more).

［Causes］・ Line voltage rising・ Regeneration action etc.・ Malfunction of detectors

［Check and remedy］① This inverter is not mounted with a regeneration function. Check the mode if regeneration

operation.If operated in regeneration mode, adjust acceleration or deceleration time in setting No.29to 34 and 45 to 54 to make the inverter deceleration time long (See pages of 4-22 to 25 fordetails.)

② Check whether line voltage exceeds + 10% of rated voltage.If exceeding, change the main transformer tap.

③ Check the initial charge voltage of the cell circuit whether it is within ± 3% of the valuecomputed by the below formula, and check the actual value ;when 6.6kV output specificaion, No. 453 to 455, 458, and 460 to 466.

Line voltage× 1810 V = cell main circuit initial charge voltage

input transformer tap voltage

When exceeding ±3 %, the failure of the controller may occur. It is required to replace therelevant inverter cell.

If does not corresponds to the check items of ① to ③, after breakage of control power supplyreplace the relevant inverter cell. Perform checking work again.

*3 ●SCell in-decelation main circuit overvoltageOVDEC

［Contents］ If in deceleration operation of the inverter, DC main circuit voltage has beenexcessive (DC 1050 V or more).

［Causes］ DC voltage rising due to the motor regeneration mode.

［Check and remedy］① Adjust the acceleration and deceleration time by setting No.29 – 34 and 45 – 54 to make the

inverter deceleration time long.( See pages of 4-22 -25 for details)

② Check whether line voltage exceeds +10% of the rated voltage.If exceeding, change the main circuit transformer tap.

7-25

DANGER

DANGER

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

*4

*5

S

S

●

●

Cell main circuit undervoltage P-M

Cell main circuit undervoltage M-N

UV PM

UV MN

Fault codes (17/21)

［Contents］ This is output when :① While the inverter is operated, DC main circuit voltage is too low (approximately 80%

compared to the receiving voltage), or② even when initial charging is performed, DC main circuit voltage does not exceed

detection level.

［Causes] ① The line voltage drops .② AC input fuse is blown,③ In initial charging side, actuating failure and wiring breakage may occur in AC

receiving power circuit (Rectifier diode initial charging resistance, DC thyristorinside cell and driving circuit).


① Check whether meltdown indication indication target of AC fuse is indicated.If the fuse is blown, it is required to replace the inverter cell.

② Check whether the main transformer tap is selected correctly .③ Check whether the line voltage is within ±10% of the rated voltage.④ Check whether setting No.158 [Cell rated voltage selection] is set like as below.

Setting No.158 : 5, 7 (input rated voltage :6600 V): 0, 2 (input rated voltage :6000 V)

If the setting value is different, set it correctly.After setting, switch on the control power supply and the main circuit power supply again,and then check again.

⑤ Check whether the initial charging voltage of the cell main circuit is within ± 3% of thevalue computed by below formula, and check actual value data,when 6.6kV output specificaion, No. 453 to 455, 458, and 460 to 466.

Line voltage× 1810V = Cell main circuit initial charging voltage

Input transformer tap voltage

When it does not correspond, thyristor can be abnormal. Replace the local controller insidethe relevant cell and inverter cell, and perform checking work again.

7-26

DANGER

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

*7 S ●Cell PWM optical link errorPWM

Fault codes (18/21)

［Contents］ This is detected when the failure of optical link for PWM signal has occurred.

［Causes] ① Contact failure of the optical link, or light volume lowering② A local controller is abnormal.③ Main controller is abnormal.


① Check whether the optical cable (RM2) of the front face of the local controller inside cell (see page of 2-15) and the optical cable (TM1 to TM21) of the optical converter unit PCB (CDJC1EOK-□□□□□, see pages of 2-11 to 14) are connected as the correct combination.

If those are connected correctly, check whether optical cables are broken or bended on the way.② When the fault no.*8 cell control power supply lowering is detected concurrently while no occurrence

of the instantaneous power interruption, a failure of the power supply inside the inverter cell or a failure of the local controller may occur. Replace the relevant inverter cell.

If it does not correspond to the check items in ① to ②, it is required to replace the control stack (RKJS1SXK-□□□□□) or the optical converter unit PCB (CDJC1EOK-□□□□□, see pages of 2-11to 14).

*6 S ●Cell main circuit voltage unbalanceUNB

［Contents］ This is output when the deviation between DC voltage P and N sides in the cell continues toexceed 14 % or more of the rated voltage for 5 seconds.

［Causes］① AC input fuse is blown.② Breakage of the diode component③ The local controller is abnormal.


① Check whether meltdown indication indication target of AC fuse is indicated.If the fuse is blown, it is required to replace the inverter cell.

② Check whether the initial charging voltage of the cell main circuit is within ± 3% of the valuecomputed by below formula and check the actual value data,when 6.6kV output specificaion, No. 453 to 455, 458, and 460 to 466.

Line voltage× 1810V = Cell main circuit initial charging voltage

Input transformer tap voltage

When it does not correspond, the local controller inside the relevant cell or the diode or thyristormay be abnormal. Replace the local controller inside the relevant cell, and perform checkingwork again.

7-27

DANGER

DANGER

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Fault codes (19/21)

*9 S ●Cell cooling frame overheatingOTF

*8 ○ Selection by setting No.284

H ●Cell control power supply loweringPWRL

［Contents］ This is detected when the control power supply voltage inside cell has dropped or aabnormality of the control power supply inside cell has occurred.

［Causes］① The control power supply voltage inside a cell dropps.② The control power supply inside a cell is abnormal.


① Check whether instantaneous power interruption of the line power supply has occurred actually.If no occurrence,② check whether the fuse for the control power supply on front face of the inverter cell has

blown.If it is blown out, it is supposed that the controller inside the inverter cell or the local

controller is abnormal. Replace the relevant inverter cell.

If it does not correspond and the cell instantaneous power interruption continues, an abnormality of local controller or interface unit may occur. Replace the relevant inverter cell and perform checking work again.

［Contents］ This is detected when temperature of the cooling fin in cell exceeds 90 degree C or more.

［Causes] ① The ambient temperature rising② The air filter of the inverter panel clogging

［Check and remedy］① Check whether the ambient temperature of the inverter panel has been over 40 degree C.

If its temperature has been over 40 degree C, operate the sir conditioner to lower theambient temperature below 40 degree C.

② Check whether the air filter of the inverter panel is clogging.If the air filter is clogging, clean the air filter.

If it does not correspond and the cell instantaneous power interruption continues, an abnormality of local controller or interface unit may occur. Replace the relevant inverter cell and perform checking work again.

7-28

DANGER

DANGER

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Fault codes (20/21)

［Contents］ This is detected when an optical constructing multiplex transmission is abnormal.

［Causes] ① contact failure and light volume lowering② A local controller is abnormal③ The main controller is abnormal.


① Make the inverter receive the power again, and check whether transmission is established again.If after making the inverter receive the power again, transmission was not established and theoptical link failure has occurred again.

② Check whether the shortcut connector is mounted perfectly on CNT terminal of the inverter cell.Moreover, check whether a fuse for the control power supply in the inverter cell front face hasbeen blown.

③ Check whether the optical cables (RM1, TM1) of the front face of the local controller inside cell(see page of 2-15) and the optical cables (CN26, CN27) of the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□,see page of 2-2) are connected correctly.If those are connected correctly, check whether an optical cable is broken or bended on the way.

④ When the fault No.*8 cell control power supply lowering is detected concurrently while no occurrenceof the instantaneous power interruption, a failure of the power supply inside the inverter cell or afailure of the controller may occur. Replace the relevant inverter cell. (the mark "*" is filledwith 4 to 18 corresponded)

If it does not correspond to the check items in ① to ④, it is required to replace the control stack(RKJS1SXK-□□□□□) or the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2).

7-29

DANGER

Major fault 2

Middlefault

Minor fault 1


Fault code

Major fault 1


193 S ●LLINKU1 cell Local optical link error


195 S ●LLINK


196


197


198 S ●LLINK


199 S ●LLINK

U3 cell Local optical link error

200 S ●LLINK

201


202

203 S ●LLINK


204 S ●LLINK

205 S ●LLINK

206

207

Spare Spare

Spare Spare

Spare Spare

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Fault codes (21/21)

7-30

Note) The presumption simplification of the locating fault is aimed at in the following failures since CDJS1FLX-5275A/A the soft model written in local controller (CDJC1FCU-5150□) in the inverter cell. (example)It is presumed that abnormality occurs on the optical transmission road between the V1 cell and the V2 cell when the failure is registered to failure No.199(V2 cell local optical link malfunction)-205(W3 cell local optical link malfunction). Please confirm the V1 cell and the V2 cell first when you do the above-mentioned confirmation treatment. The optical cable connection between inverter cells is connected in the following order. - For 6.6kV inverter deviceControl stack →U1 cell →U2 cell →U3 Cell →V1 cell →V2 cell →→V3 cell →W1 cell →W2 cell →W3 cell → control stack

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

7–4 Loader Trace-back Data List

The following trace backing data can be gathered with the loader (option). "High-speed trace" that gathers data at 1ms sampling interval after 24ms before 200ms of failure generation point "Low-speed trace" that gathers data at 200ms sampling interval after 4.8s before 40s of failure generation pointTwo kinds of data can be gathered.

Data No. Data name

Frequency command HLR(acc/dec) input1

Line voltage detected

2

3

Frequency command

4

Frequency actual value

5

Voltage command (after compensation）

6

Magnetic flux filter output

7

Voltage command (AVR input)

8

Output voltage estimation filter output

9

AVR output

10

Active current Iq command

11

Reactive current Id command

12

Active current Iq detected

13

Reactive current Id detected

14

Output current detected (Motor conversion)

15

16

17

U1 cell main circuit voltage detected

18


19

V1 cell main circuit voltage detected

Loader trace-back data list (1/2) [Analog data]

20

V2 cell main circuit voltage detected21

W1 cell main circuit voltage detected

22

W2 cell main circuit voltage detected

23


24

U4 cell main circuit voltage detected [Spare]

25

V3 cell main circuit voltage detected

26

V4 cell main circuit voltage detected [Spare]

27 W3 cell main circuit voltage detected

W4 cell main circuit voltage detected [Spare]28

Cell cooling fins temperature detected (Max. value)

Main controller temperature detected

7-31

30

31

29

U5 cell main circuit voltage detected [Spare]

V5 cell main circuit voltage detected [Spare]

W5 cell main circuit voltage detected [Spare]

－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Data No Data name

39

Frequency matching (PS)

40

Slip in-limitation

41

AVR in-saturation

42

Current in-limitation

43

Minor fault

44

Emergency stop processing in progress

Transmission error (TER)

Electrical condition ready (ERD)

Circuit breaker answer (RNMC)

32

Brake release (SS)

33

Operation in progress

34

Pulse ON (PON)

35

Operation command 1 (SY1)

36

Di operation command (RUN)

37

Instantaneous power interruption processing in progress (PDOWN)

38

Search end

Loader trace-back data list (2/2) [Digital data]

47

48

49

50

51

52

45

46

Synchronous switching processing in progress

Phases matching

Synchronous completed

Inverter breaker answer

Line instantaneous power stop interrupted

Switching from inverter to bypass operation command

Switching from bypass to inverter operation command53

Bypass circuit breaker answer

54

55

7-32

57

58

59

60

61

62

56

63

64

ON

~OFF2

~OFF3

INV_EN

RFG_EN

F_ECO

RFG_ST

SET_EN

PLC_EN

JOG+

JOG-

ACKN

PROFIBUSrelation

65

67

66

－－ INR-HJ5235-E7-33

1. Inverter input beaker can not be switched ON.

(1) Check if electrical conditions are completed (Indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07: ■ is indicated

because ERD of start-up conditions are uncompleted).

If electrical conditions are uncompleted and ERD of Relay unit is not ON, check following items.

① Check if Major fault 1 (by occurrence of major fault, indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07: FTH1

for start-up conditions is indicated in ■) or Major fault 2 (by occurrence of Major fault 2,

indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07: FTH2 for start-up condition is indicated in ■) has

occurred.

If Major fault 1 or Major fault 2 has occurred, with referring to items "Fault diagnosis" in

Chapter 7, eliminate fault causes.

② Check if Minor fault 1 ( by occurrence of minor fault１, indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07:

FTL1 for start-up conditions is indicated in ■) has occurred.

If Minor fault 1 has occurred, with referring to items "Fault diagnosis" in Chapter 7, eliminate

fault causes.

③ Check if external electrical conditions DI [RD] are input (by non-input, indication No.380 or

Touch Panel M07: RD for start-up conditions is indicated in ■).

If no input, with referring to elementary wiring diagram, establish the external conditions connected

to terminals of No. TB1-12 and 13 or No. TB3-6 of Relay unit (see page of 2-27).

④ Check if all setting data are set ( because there is any non-setting, indication No.380 or Touch

Panel M07: UNSET for start-up conditions is indicated in ■).

If there is any non-setting datum, data setting No. which are not yet set are indicated by indication

No.999. Input setting data which are recorded in the testing report.

⑤ Check if instantaneous power interruption is detected ( by detection, indication No.380 or Touch

Panel M07: PWRL for start-up conditions is indicated in ■).

If instantaneous power interruption has been detected, with referring the fault code details [see

page 7-13] of instantaneous power interruption [Fault code No.10], recover it.

⑥ Check if line instantaneous power interruption has been detected ( by detection, indication No.380

or Touch Panel M07: MPWRL for stat-up conditions is indicated in ■).

If line instantaneous power interruption has been detected, with referring the fault code details [see

page 7-13] of line instantaneous power interruption [Fault code No.11], recover it.

Trouble shooting (1/4)

7–5 Trouble shooting

－－ INR-HJ5235-E7-34

(2) Referring to elementary wiring diagram, check if any conditions other than electrical

conditions are established.

⑦ Check if DI error is input, or not (By input, indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07: DIERR

for start-up conditions is is indicated in ■).

If Di error has been input, eliminate DI error.

・ If DI [X1 to X9, X11 to X14], where external Major fault [DI function selection

setting No.4] is assigned, is input (by input, DI corresponding to indication No.382 is

indicated in ■), eliminate the fault cause connected to the relevant terminal of Relay unit

(see page of 2-27).

・ If DI [X1 to X9, X11 to X14], where external Minor fault [DI function selection

setting No.5] is assigned, is input (by input, DI corresponding to indication No.382 is

indicated in ■), eliminate the fault cause connected to the relevant terminal of Relay unit

(see page of 2-27).

・ If a fan temperature system Major fault is input (by input, FANH in indication No.381

is indicated in ■), with referring details of fault codes (page 7-17) of Fan temperature system

/ Major fault [Fault code No.26], eliminate the fault cause.

・ If a fan temperature system Minor fault is input (by input, FANL in indication No.381

is indicated in ■), with referring details of fault codes (page 7-17) of Fan temperature system

/ Minor fault [Fault code No.27], eliminate the fault cause.

・ Check AC input fuse target in the front face of the inverter cell.

If the target is indicated, AC input fuse has been blown. It is required to replace the inverter

cell.

If it is more than above descriptions, it is supposed that Di fault inside the inverter cell (by a fault

has been detected, the relevant cell in indication No.387 is indicated in ■).

Please contact us.


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

２．Operation can not be carried out.

(1) Check if input breaker answer-back signal is input ( by no input, indication No.380 or Touch Panel

M07: MCRN for start-up conditions is indicated in ■). If no input, with referring page 7-33, check

if electrical conditions are established completely.

If electrical conditions have been established, with referring the elementary wiring ,check if any

condition other than electrical conditions for the circuit breaker switching-on condition .

(2) If a condition of line voltage detection is valid (setting No.293 = 1), check if line instantaneous

power interruption ha been detected (by detection of instantaneous power interruption, indication

No.380 or Touch Panel M07: MPWRL for start-up conditions is indicated in ■).

If instantaneous power interruption has been detected, with referring details (page of 7-13) of fault

codes for instantaneous power interruption [Fault code No.11], recover the instantaneous power

interruption.

(3) Check if DI pulse off conditions are input (by input, indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07:

POFF for start-up conditions is indicated in ■).

If it is input, check if [X1 to X9, X11 to X14], where pulse off [DI function selection No.8] is

allocated, is input (by input, the relevant DI in indication No.382 is indicated in ■), and eliminate

pulse off command connected to the relevant terminal of Relay unit (see page 2-27).

(4) Check if emergency stop SYX is input (by input, indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07:

ETC. for start-up conditions is indicated in ■).

If it is input, check DI [X1 to X9, X11 to X14], where emergency stop [DI function selection No.1]

is allocated, is input (by input, the relevant DI in indication No.382 is indicated in ■), and eliminate

pulse off command connected to the relevant terminal of Relay unit (see page 2-27).

(5) If condition of switchover between line and the inverter is valid (setting No.300 = 1), check if the

inverter breaker was switched on when start-up of variable speed operation by the inverter (by

non-input, indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07: MCINV for start-up conditions is indicated in ■).

If it is not input, check if DI[X1 to X9, X11 to X14], where the inverter breaker answer-back [DI

function selection No.29] is allocated, is input (by input, the relevant DI for indication No. is

indicated in ■),

and check if the breaker answer-back signal connected to the relevant terminal of Relay unit

(see page of 2-27) is input.

Check if the bypass breaker is switched on when switching from line to the inverter is carried out,

and check if DI [X1 to X9, X11 to X14] ,where the bypass beaker answer-back [DI function

selection No.30] is allocated, is input (by input, the relevant DI in indication No.382 is indicated

in ■).

If it is not input, check if the breaker answer-back signal connected to the relevant terminal of

Relay unit (see page of 2-27) is input.

(6) Check if frequency command is input.

① When operation by analog frequency command,

・ check if analog frequency operation mode is set (setting No.165 = xx1x).

・ check if DI analog frequency setting mode is selected, and check that DI [X1 to X9, X11 to

X14], where DI/AI speed command switching [DI function selection No.11] is allocated, is input

(by input the relevant DI in indication No.382 is indicated in ■).

・ check if DI operation command is input (by input, RUN in indication No.381 is indicated in ■).

・ check if analog frequency command is input ( indication No.469 is other than "0").


7-35

－－ INR-HJ5235-E7-36

② When Di frequency command operation,

・ check if DI frequency command operation mode is set (setting No.160 = x1xx).

・ check if DI analog frequency setting mode is not selected and DI [X1 to X9, X11 to X14],

where DI/AI speed command switching [DI function selection No.11] are allocated,

not input (by non-input, the relevant DI in indication No.382 is indicated in □).

・ check if DI operation command is input (by input, RUN for indication No.381 is

indicated in ■).

・ check if DI [X1 to X9, X11 to X14], where forward revolution command [DI function

selection No.2] and reverse revolution command [DI function selection No.3] are allocated,

is input (by input, the relevant DI in indication No.382 is indicated in ■).

③ when transmission operation,

・ check if transmission operation mode is set (setting No.160 = xxx0).

・ check if transmission is normal (by normality, indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07:

TER for start-up conditions is indicated in □).

・ check if transmission operation command "SY1" is input (by input, SY1 for indication

No.748 is indicated in ■).

・ check if transmission frequency command is input (indication No.720 is other than "0").

④ When Touch Panel operation:

・ check if Touch Panel operation mode is set (setting No.160 = xxx1).

・ check if it is set that Touch Panel operation can not perform (by setting No.161 = xx1x,

impossible to operate).

・ With referring to section 3-6-2 "Operation from Touch Panel" (page of 3-12),

perform operation.

(7) check SW 6 on the control PCB (CDJC1FCU-5131□, see page of 2-2).

When SW 6 is short-circuited with No. 1-2 pin (by input, indication No.380 or Touch Panel M07:

ETC. for start-up conditions is indicated in ■), the control PCB is set in testing mode setting for

our company. Therefore, after switching off the control power supply, release the No.1-2 pin of

SW 6 (or short-circuit No. 2-3 pin). And then switch on the control power supply.


－－ INR-HJ5235-E

Chapter 8 Preventive Maintenance

8-1 Preventive Maintenance

The inverter incorporates many devices. Some of them have limited life. This chapter shows recommended period of replacing their parts as preventive maintenance.

Classif-ication

Part nameReplace period

(years) Location Remarks

Resisto

rs

Ceramic resistor, wirewound resistor

7.5 to 10Inverter cell unit Ground fault detection circuit, etc.

The interval is considerably affected by environmental conditions. If winding or ceramic has been disfigured by heat, replacement without delay is necessary.

Capacito

rs

Aluminum electrolytic capacitor

5 to 7

Power supply unit Interface unitCell controller Inverter DC intermediate section

The life depends on ripple current and ambient conditions. In case of electrolyte leakage, replacement without delay is necessary.

Other capacitors (oil, film, etc.)

10 to 15

Diode rectifier Inverter unitGround fault detectioncircuit

If discolored or disfigured or in case of insulation oil leakage of oil capacitor, replacement without delay is necessary.

Wire

wound parts

Electromagnetic contactor, auxiliary relay

5 to 10Relay unitAuxiliary relay circuit, etc.

Normally excited coil life is given. Contact reaches its end of life due to wear after approximately 1 million operations electrically and 10 million operations mechanically.

Transformer, reactor

10 to 30Transformer panelControl output panel inside

If insulation material is deteriorated by overheat of winding, replacement is necessary.

Coolin

g de

vice

Cooling fan (bearing)

2(Approximately

20,000 hours)

Transformer panel insideInverter panel inside

As bearings may get worn due to long-term operation, a faulty bearing may cause the motor to burn. Therefore, it must be replaced as soon as such a sign is recognized.

Pro

tective

devic

e

Fuse 5 to 10

Diode rectifier input section (inverter DC section)Others

Will have to be replaced every 5 to 10 years to ensure the reliability.

Oth

ers

MCCB (FAB) 10 to 15Control output panel inside


Meters 10 to 15Control output panel inside


Indicator lamp 1 to 2Control output panel inside

Other than LED type.

Air filter 1 In each panel

Must be replaced approximately every year although depending on dust contained in air. Must be replaced and cleaned oftener than usual in dusty environment.

8-1

frenic4600fm5d cdjs1fvx-5316a ver - fuji electric · · 2016-06-06we are grateful for your...

Documents